WO2020233517A1 - Application display method and electronic device - Google Patents

Application display method and electronic device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020233517A1
WO2020233517A1 PCT/CN2020/090502 CN2020090502W WO2020233517A1 WO 2020233517 A1 WO2020233517 A1 WO 2020233517A1 CN 2020090502 W CN2020090502 W CN 2020090502W WO 2020233517 A1 WO2020233517 A1 WO 2020233517A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
interface
screen
electronic device
display area
display
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2020/090502
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
江秀萍
梁好为
徐杰
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2020233517A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020233517A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F1/00Details not covered by groups G06F3/00 - G06F13/00 and G06F21/00
    • G06F1/16Constructional details or arrangements
    • G06F1/1613Constructional details or arrangements for portable computers
    • G06F1/1633Constructional details or arrangements of portable computers not specific to the type of enclosures covered by groups G06F1/1615 - G06F1/1626
    • G06F1/1637Details related to the display arrangement, including those related to the mounting of the display in the housing
    • G06F1/1652Details related to the display arrangement, including those related to the mounting of the display in the housing the display being flexible, e.g. mimicking a sheet of paper, or rollable
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F1/00Details not covered by groups G06F3/00 - G06F13/00 and G06F21/00
    • G06F1/16Constructional details or arrangements
    • G06F1/1613Constructional details or arrangements for portable computers
    • G06F1/1633Constructional details or arrangements of portable computers not specific to the type of enclosures covered by groups G06F1/1615 - G06F1/1626
    • G06F1/1637Details related to the display arrangement, including those related to the mounting of the display in the housing
    • G06F1/1641Details related to the display arrangement, including those related to the mounting of the display in the housing the display being formed by a plurality of foldable display components
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F1/00Details not covered by groups G06F3/00 - G06F13/00 and G06F21/00
    • G06F1/16Constructional details or arrangements
    • G06F1/1613Constructional details or arrangements for portable computers
    • G06F1/1633Constructional details or arrangements of portable computers not specific to the type of enclosures covered by groups G06F1/1615 - G06F1/1626
    • G06F1/1675Miscellaneous details related to the relative movement between the different enclosures or enclosure parts
    • G06F1/1677Miscellaneous details related to the relative movement between the different enclosures or enclosure parts for detecting open or closed state or particular intermediate positions assumed by movable parts of the enclosure, e.g. detection of display lid position with respect to main body in a laptop, detection of opening of the cover of battery compartment
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F1/00Details not covered by groups G06F3/00 - G06F13/00 and G06F21/00
    • G06F1/16Constructional details or arrangements
    • G06F1/1613Constructional details or arrangements for portable computers
    • G06F1/1633Constructional details or arrangements of portable computers not specific to the type of enclosures covered by groups G06F1/1615 - G06F1/1626
    • G06F1/1684Constructional details or arrangements related to integrated I/O peripherals not covered by groups G06F1/1635 - G06F1/1675
    • G06F1/1694Constructional details or arrangements related to integrated I/O peripherals not covered by groups G06F1/1635 - G06F1/1675 the I/O peripheral being a single or a set of motion sensors for pointer control or gesture input obtained by sensing movements of the portable computer
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/048Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
    • G06F3/0487Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser
    • G06F3/0488Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser using a touch-screen or digitiser, e.g. input of commands through traced gestures
    • G06F3/04886Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser using a touch-screen or digitiser, e.g. input of commands through traced gestures by partitioning the display area of the touch-screen or the surface of the digitising tablet into independently controllable areas, e.g. virtual keyboards or menus
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04MTELEPHONIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04M1/00Substation equipment, e.g. for use by subscribers
    • H04M1/02Constructional features of telephone sets
    • H04M1/0202Portable telephone sets, e.g. cordless phones, mobile phones or bar type handsets
    • H04M1/0206Portable telephones comprising a plurality of mechanically joined movable body parts, e.g. hinged housings
    • H04M1/0208Portable telephones comprising a plurality of mechanically joined movable body parts, e.g. hinged housings characterized by the relative motions of the body parts
    • H04M1/0214Foldable telephones, i.e. with body parts pivoting to an open position around an axis parallel to the plane they define in closed position
    • H04M1/0216Foldable in one direction, i.e. using a one degree of freedom hinge
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04MTELEPHONIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04M1/00Substation equipment, e.g. for use by subscribers
    • H04M1/72Mobile telephones; Cordless telephones, i.e. devices for establishing wireless links to base stations without route selection
    • H04M1/724User interfaces specially adapted for cordless or mobile telephones
    • H04M1/72448User interfaces specially adapted for cordless or mobile telephones with means for adapting the functionality of the device according to specific conditions
    • H04M1/72454User interfaces specially adapted for cordless or mobile telephones with means for adapting the functionality of the device according to specific conditions according to context-related or environment-related conditions
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04MTELEPHONIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04M1/00Substation equipment, e.g. for use by subscribers
    • H04M1/72Mobile telephones; Cordless telephones, i.e. devices for establishing wireless links to base stations without route selection
    • H04M1/724User interfaces specially adapted for cordless or mobile telephones
    • H04M1/72469User interfaces specially adapted for cordless or mobile telephones for operating the device by selecting functions from two or more displayed items, e.g. menus or icons
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F2200/00Indexing scheme relating to G06F1/04 - G06F1/32
    • G06F2200/16Indexing scheme relating to G06F1/16 - G06F1/18
    • G06F2200/161Indexing scheme relating to constructional details of the monitor
    • G06F2200/1614Image rotation following screen orientation, e.g. switching from landscape to portrait mode
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F2203/00Indexing scheme relating to G06F3/00 - G06F3/048
    • G06F2203/048Indexing scheme relating to G06F3/048
    • G06F2203/04803Split screen, i.e. subdividing the display area or the window area into separate subareas
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F2203/00Indexing scheme relating to G06F3/00 - G06F3/048
    • G06F2203/048Indexing scheme relating to G06F3/048
    • G06F2203/04806Zoom, i.e. interaction techniques or interactors for controlling the zooming operation
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F2203/00Indexing scheme relating to G06F3/00 - G06F3/048
    • G06F2203/048Indexing scheme relating to G06F3/048
    • G06F2203/04808Several contacts: gestures triggering a specific function, e.g. scrolling, zooming, right-click, when the user establishes several contacts with the surface simultaneously; e.g. using several fingers or a combination of fingers and pen

Definitions

  • the embodiments of the present application relate to the field of electronic technology, and in particular to an application display method and electronic equipment.
  • an electronic device with a larger display screen such as a folding screen mobile phone
  • displays an application interface there may be a problem that the display content of the electronic device is relatively single, and the display screen of the electronic device is not fully utilized.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide an application display method and electronic device.
  • the display content of the electronic device can be switched between one interface of an application and multiple interfaces of an application, so that the display content of the electronic device can be richer. Improve the utilization of the display screen of electronic equipment.
  • embodiments of the present application provide an application display method, which can be applied to an electronic device including a touch screen.
  • the method may include: the electronic device displays the first interface of the first application in the first display area and the second display area of the touch screen, and the touch screen does not display the second interface of the first application; in response to the first operation of the user, the electronic device The first content of the first interface is displayed in the first display area, and the second interface is displayed in the second display area. In response to the second operation of the user, the electronic device displays the first interface in the first display area and the second display area. The second interface is displayed, or the second content is displayed in the first display area and the second display area, and the first interface is not displayed.
  • the first content may be the entire content of the first interface or part of the content of the first interface.
  • the second content can be the entire content of the second interface or part of the content of the second interface.
  • the electronic device in response to the user's first operation, can switch the window mode of the touch screen from the single window mode to the dual window mode, and the touch screen displays the contents of the first interface of the first application and the contents of the second interface in dual windows.
  • Content that is, the touch screen simultaneously displays the content of the two interfaces of the first application in two display areas.
  • the touch screen can present more display content of the first application to the user, can increase the amount of information displayed on the touch screen at the same time, and improve the utilization rate of the display area of the touch screen.
  • the above-mentioned touch screen may be a folding screen.
  • the folding screen can be folded to form at least two screens.
  • the at least two screens include a first screen and a second screen.
  • this method can be applied when the folding screen is in an unfolded state.
  • the expanded state is a state where the included angle between the first screen and the second screen is greater than a preset included angle threshold.
  • the method may further include: in response to the folding screen being transformed from the unfolded state to the folded state, the electronic device displays the first screen on the first screen. Interface, the second interface is not displayed.
  • the folded state is a state where the included angle between the first screen and the second screen is less than or equal to a preset included angle threshold.
  • the first screen when the folding screen is in the folded state, the first screen is used as the main screen to display the main interface or application interface (such as the first interface) of the mobile phone, and the second screen may be black.
  • the first screen in response to the folding screen transitioning from the unfolded state to the folded state, the first screen may display the above-mentioned first interface.
  • the above-mentioned first display area is a display area corresponding to the first screen
  • the second display area is a display area corresponding to the second screen.
  • the above-mentioned folding screen is folded along a folding edge or a folding axis to form a first screen and a second screen.
  • the first display area and the second display area are divided by the folding edge or the folding axis, and one side of the folding edge or the folding axis on the folding screen is the first display area, and the other side is the second display area.
  • the left side of the folding edge on the folding screen is the first display area
  • the right side of the folding edge on the folding screen is the second display Area
  • the right side of the folding edge on the folding screen is the first display area
  • the left side of the folding edge on the folding screen is the second display area.
  • the first display area and the second display area are pre-configured in the electronic device; or, the first display area and the second display area Set by the user in the electronic device. That is, the first display area may not be the display area corresponding to the first screen.
  • the electronic device displaying the first interface on the first screen may include: responding to the gradually decreasing angle between the first screen and the second screen, The electronic device displays the first interface on the touch screen from the interface layout adapting the first display area to the interface layout adapting to the dynamically changing image of the first screen, until the angle between the first screen and the second screen is equal to the preset angle threshold, the electronic device The first interface is displayed on the first screen. Wherein, when the included angle between the first screen and the second screen is greater than the preset included angle threshold, the electronic device displays the first interface on the first screen.
  • the above-mentioned touch screen may be a non-folding screen.
  • the above method can be applied to an electronic device (such as a touch screen of an electronic device) in a horizontal screen state.
  • the horizontal screen state is a state where the angle between the long side of the touch screen and the horizontal plane is less than a preset value.
  • the touch screen may be a non-folding screen
  • the first display area and the second display area are pre-configured in the electronic device.
  • the first display area and the second display area are set by the user in the electronic device.
  • the above method may further include: the electronic device receives a user's drag operation on the dividing line of the first display area and the second display area; in response to the drag operation, the electronic device The device displays a dynamic image in which the sizes of the first display area and the second display area change with the movement of the dividing line on the touch screen. Wherein, the dividing line between the changed first display area and the second display area is located at the stop position of the drag operation.
  • the above-mentioned first display area is located on the right side of the dividing line, and the second display area is located on the left side of the dividing line.
  • the electronic device displays the first interface on the touch screen;
  • the electronic device displays the second content on the touch screen.
  • the electronic device in response to the second operation, can display the interface layout of the first interface on the touch screen to adapt to the dynamically changing image of the first display area, and the interface layout of the second interface Adapting the dynamically changing image of the second display area until the drag distance of the dividing line by the second operation is greater than the preset distance, and the electronic device displays the first interface or the second content on the touch screen.
  • the above-mentioned first operation may include: a first sliding operation and a second sliding operation, and the second operation includes: a third sliding operation and a fourth sliding operation.
  • the first sliding operation is a left-to-right sliding operation input in the first display area
  • the second sliding operation is a right-to-left sliding operation input in the second display area
  • the third sliding operation is input in the first display area
  • the fourth sliding operation is the sliding operation input from left to right in the second display area.
  • the first sliding operation is a right-to-left sliding operation input in the first display area
  • the second sliding operation is a left-to-right sliding operation input in the second display area
  • the third sliding operation is input in the first display area.
  • the fourth sliding operation is a sliding operation from right to left entered in the second display area.
  • the first sliding operation, second sliding operation, third sliding operation and fourth sliding operation in the embodiment of the present application may be from the non-edge area of the folding screen Start sliding operation.
  • the above-mentioned first sliding operation and the second sliding operation are arc-shaped sliding operations; and/or, the third sliding operation and the fourth sliding operation are arc-shaped sliding operations.
  • the arc of the sliding trajectory corresponding to the arc-shaped sliding operation is different from the sliding trajectory corresponding to the back operation.
  • the first operation when the touch screen is a folding screen, can be the first preset folding operation on the folding screen; the second operation can be the second folding screen on the folding screen. Preset folding operation. Wherein, the first preset folding operation is different from the second preset folding operation.
  • the above-mentioned second interface may be the homepage of the first application.
  • the second interface may be an interface higher than the first interface.
  • the second interface may be the interface of the first application that was recently displayed before the electronic device displays the first interface.
  • the second interface may be an interface preset in the first application.
  • embodiments of the present application provide an electronic device, which includes a touch screen, a memory, and one or more processors; the touch screen, the memory, and the processor are coupled; the memory is used to store computer program codes, and the computer program codes include a computer Instructions, when the processor executes the computer instructions, the electronic device executes: the processor is used to control the touch screen in the first display area and the second display area of the touch screen, display the first interface of the first application, and control the touch screen not to display the first application
  • the first interface includes the first content
  • the processor is further configured to, in response to the user's first operation, control the touch screen to display the first content in the first display area, and display the first application of the first application in the second display area
  • the second interface includes second content; the processor is further configured to control the touch screen to display the first interface in the first display area and the second display area in response to a second operation of the user.
  • the above-mentioned touch screen is a folding screen, and the folding screen can be folded to form at least two screens, and the at least two screens include a first screen and a second screen.
  • the folding screen is in an unfolded state; the unfolded state is a state where the angle between the first screen and the second screen is greater than a preset angle threshold.
  • the above-mentioned processor is further configured to control the first screen to display the first interface in response to the conversion of the folding screen from the unfolded state to the folded state.
  • the folded state is a state where the included angle between the first screen and the second screen is less than or equal to a preset included angle threshold.
  • the above-mentioned first display area is a display area corresponding to the first screen
  • the second display area is a display area corresponding to the second screen.
  • the above-mentioned first display area is not a display area corresponding to the first screen.
  • the processor is configured to control the first screen to display the first interface in response to the folding screen changing from the unfolded state to the folded state, including: in response to the angle between the first screen and the second screen being gradually reduced, controlling the touch screen to display the first interface From the interface layout adapting the first display area to the interface layout adapting the dynamically changing image of the first screen, until the angle between the first screen and the second screen is equal to the preset angle threshold, the first screen is controlled to display the first interface. Wherein, when the included angle between the first screen and the second screen is greater than the preset included angle threshold, the first screen displays the first interface.
  • the above electronic device is in a horizontal screen state; wherein, the horizontal screen state is a state where the angle between the long side of the touch screen and the horizontal plane is less than a preset value.
  • the above-mentioned first display area and second display area are pre-configured in the electronic device; or, the first display area and the second display area are set by the user in the electronic device .
  • the above-mentioned processor is further configured to receive a user's drag operation on the dividing line of the first display area and the second display area; in response to the drag operation, control the touch screen Displays a moving image in which the sizes of the first display area and the second display area change with the movement of the dividing line.
  • the dividing line between the changed first display area and the second display area is located at the stop position of the drag operation.
  • the above-mentioned first display area is located on the right side of the dividing line
  • the second display area is located on the left side of the dividing line.
  • the above-mentioned processor is configured to control the touch screen to display the first interface or the second content in response to a second operation of the user, and includes: a processor, configured to respond to the first The second operation is to control the touch screen to display the interface layout of the first interface to adapt to the dynamically changing image of the first display area, and the interface layout of the second interface to adapt to the dynamically changing image of the second display area, until the second operation drags the dividing line The distance is greater than the preset distance, and the touch screen is controlled to display the first interface or the second content.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a display device, which can be applied to an electronic device including the above-mentioned touch screen, and the device is used to perform the operations described in the first aspect or the second aspect and any one of the possible design methods thereof. Methods.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a chip system, which is applied to an electronic device including the aforementioned touch screen.
  • the chip system includes one or more interface circuits and one or more processors.
  • the interface circuit and the processor are interconnected by wires.
  • the interface circuit is used to receive a signal from the memory of the electronic device and send the signal to the processor, and the signal includes a computer instruction stored in the memory.
  • the processor executes the computer instruction
  • the electronic device executes the method described in the first aspect or the second aspect and any one of the possible design manners thereof.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer storage medium, the computer storage medium includes computer instructions, when the computer instructions run on an electronic device, the electronic device is caused to execute the first aspect or the second aspect and The method described in any of its possible design methods.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a computer program product.
  • the computer program product runs on a computer
  • the computer can execute as described in the first aspect or the second aspect and any of its possible design methods. The method described.
  • the electronic equipment described in the second aspect and any of its possible design methods provided above, the device described in the third aspect, the chip system described in the fourth aspect, and the computer storage device described in the fifth aspect are for the medium, the beneficial effects that can be achieved by the computer program product described in the sixth aspect may refer to the beneficial effects in the first aspect and any of its possible design methods, which will not be repeated here.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a folding screen provided by an embodiment of the application
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of another folding screen provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of another folding screen provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of an example of a display interface of a folding screen provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of an example of a display interface of another folding screen provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of an electronic device provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 7A is a flowchart of an application display method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 7B is a schematic diagram of an example of a display area provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 7C is a schematic diagram of an example of a display interface of another folding screen provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 7D is a schematic diagram of an example of a display interface of another folding screen provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 8A is a schematic diagram of an example of a display interface of another folding screen provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • 8B is a schematic diagram of an example of a display interface of an electronic device in the prior art
  • 8C is a schematic diagram of an example of an activity record stack provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • 8D is a schematic diagram of an example of a display interface of another folding screen provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of an example of a display interface of another folding screen provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of an example of a display interface of another folding screen provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • 11A is a schematic diagram of an example of a display interface of another folding screen provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 11B is a schematic diagram of an example of a horizontal screen state and a vertical screen state of an electronic device according to an embodiment of the application;
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of an example of a display interface of another folding screen provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of an example of a display area setting interface provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of another example of a setting interface of a display area provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • 15 is a schematic diagram of another example of a setting interface of a display area provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • 16 is a schematic diagram of another example of a setting interface of a display area provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram of another example of a setting interface of a display area provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram of another example of a setting interface of a display area provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram of a chip system provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • first and second are only used for descriptive purposes, and cannot be understood as indicating or implying relative importance or implicitly indicating the number of indicated technical features. Thus, the features defined with “first” and “second” may explicitly or implicitly include one or more of these features. In the description of this embodiment, unless otherwise specified, “plurality” means two or more.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides an application display method, which can be applied to a large-screen electronic device, that is, an electronic device including a larger touch screen.
  • a large-screen electronic device that is, an electronic device including a larger touch screen.
  • the touch screen may be a folding screen.
  • the above-mentioned folding screen can be folded to form at least two screens.
  • the folding screen can be folded along the folding edge to form the first screen and the second screen.
  • the at least two screens formed after the folding screen is folded may be multiple independent screens or a complete screen in an integrated structure, but at least two parts are formed by folding.
  • the aforementioned folding screen may be a flexible folding screen.
  • the flexible folding screen includes folding edges made of flexible materials. Part or all of the flexible folding screen is made of flexible materials. For example, only the foldable part of the flexible folding screen (such as folding edges) is made of flexible materials, and the other parts are made of rigid materials; or, the flexible folding screen is all made of flexible materials.
  • the folding screen can be folded along the folding edge to form multiple (two or more) screens.
  • the folding screen shown in (a) in FIG. 1 is a flexible folding screen.
  • the folding screen shown in (a) in Figure 1 is a complete display screen, which includes folding edges made of flexible materials. After the folding screen is folded along the folding edge, the A screen 101 and the B screen 102 (that is, the first screen and the second screen) shown in (b) of FIG. 1 can be formed.
  • the flexible folding screen can also be folded to form three or more than three screens.
  • FIG. 1 and related descriptions which will not be repeated here.
  • the folding screen may be a multi-screen folding screen.
  • the multi-screen folding screen may include multiple (two or more) screens. It should be noted that these multiple screens are multiple separate display screens. These multiple screens can be connected by folding shafts in sequence. Each screen can be rotated around a folding axis connected to it to realize the folding of multi-screen folding screens.
  • the folding screen shown in (a) in FIG. 2 is a multi-screen folding screen.
  • the multi-screen folding screen includes two separate screens, called A screen 201 and B screen 202 (i.e., the first screen and the second screen).
  • a screen 201 and the B screen 202 are connected by a folding shaft, and the A screen 201 and the B screen 202 can rotate around the folding shaft to realize the folding of the multi-screen folding screen.
  • the multi-screen folding screen may also include three or more than three screens.
  • FIG. 2 and related descriptions which will not be repeated here.
  • the folding screen of the electronic device is folded longitudinally to realize the folding of the folding screen.
  • the folding screen of the electronic device can also be folded horizontally to realize the folding of the folding screen.
  • the A screen and the B screen shown in Figure 3 (b) can be formed in sequence, and the screen in Figure 3 (c) A screen and B screen shown.
  • the folding screen is in the unfolded state specifically may be: the angle between the first screen and the second screen is 180°; or, the first The absolute value of the difference between the angle between the screen and the second screen and 180° is less than the preset angle threshold.
  • the preset angle threshold may be 5°, 10°, or 15°.
  • the angle ⁇ between the A screen and the B screen is 180°.
  • the interface when the folding screen is in the folded state, the interface can be displayed on the first screen; when the folding screen is in the expanded state, the interface can be displayed on the first screen and the second screen.
  • the first screen when the folding screen is in the folded state, the first screen can be used as the main screen display interface, and the second screen can be black.
  • the dimensions of at least two screens formed by folding the folding screen can be the same or different.
  • the sizes of the A screen and the B screen shown in (b) in FIG. 1, FIG. 2 or FIG. 3 may be the same or different.
  • the first screen and the second screen of the folding screen can display the main interface of the electronic device or various application interfaces.
  • the area of the display area of the folding screen for displaying the interface is relatively large.
  • the electronic device uses a larger display area to display less display content, the content displayed on the folding screen is relatively single, and the display area of the folding screen is not fully utilized.
  • the electronic device 100 may adjust the interface layout of the application so that the interface layout of the application adapts to the unfolded folding screen.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the interface of the “Toutiao” application shown in FIG. 5.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides an application display method.
  • This method can be applied when the folding screen of the electronic device is unfolded.
  • the folding screen of the electronic device in response to a user's operation (such as the first operation), the folding screen of the electronic device can be divided into multiple areas, and the electronic device can display different interfaces of the same application in the multiple areas.
  • the multiple areas are used for display by the electronic device, so the multiple areas may also be referred to as display areas.
  • display areas there is no overlap between different display areas.
  • the folding screen of an electronic device displays different interfaces of the same application in different areas, which can increase the amount of information displayed to the user at the same time by the folding screen and improve the utilization of the display area of the folding screen.
  • the electronic devices in the embodiments of the present application may be mobile phones, tablet computers, desktops, laptops, handheld computers, notebook computers, ultra-mobile personal computers (UMPC), netbooks, and cellular computers.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device 100 provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • the electronic device 100 may include a processor 610, an external memory interface 620, an internal memory 621, a universal serial bus (USB) interface 630, a charging management module 640, a power management module 641, and a battery 642 , Antenna 1, antenna 2, mobile communication module 650, wireless communication module 660, audio module 670, speaker 670A, receiver 670B, microphone 670C, earphone interface 670D, sensor module 680, buttons 690, motor 691, indicator 692, camera 693 , The display screen 694, and the subscriber identification module (SIM) card interface 695, etc.
  • SIM subscriber identification module
  • the sensor module 680 may include a pressure sensor 680A, a gyroscope sensor 680B, an air pressure sensor 680C, a magnetic sensor 680D, an acceleration sensor 680E, a distance sensor 680F, a proximity light sensor 680G, a fingerprint sensor 680H, a temperature sensor 680J, a touch sensor 680K, and environment Light sensor 680L, bone conduction sensor 680M, etc.
  • the structure illustrated in this embodiment does not constitute a specific limitation on the electronic device 100.
  • the electronic device 100 may include more or fewer components than shown, or combine certain components, or split certain components, or arrange different components.
  • the illustrated components can be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of software and hardware.
  • the processor 610 may include one or more processing units.
  • the processor 610 may include an application processor (AP), a modem processor, a graphics processing unit (GPU), and an image signal processor. (image signal processor, ISP), controller, memory, video codec, digital signal processor (digital signal processor, DSP), baseband processor, and/or neural-network processing unit (NPU) Wait.
  • AP application processor
  • modem processor modem processor
  • GPU graphics processing unit
  • image signal processor image signal processor
  • ISP image signal processor
  • controller memory
  • video codec digital signal processor
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • NPU neural-network processing unit
  • the different processing units may be independent devices or integrated in one or more processors.
  • the controller may be the nerve center and command center of the electronic device 100.
  • the controller can generate operation control signals according to the instruction operation code and timing signals to complete the control of fetching and executing instructions.
  • a memory may also be provided in the processor 610 to store instructions and data.
  • the memory in the processor 610 is a cache memory.
  • the memory can store instructions or data that have just been used or recycled by the processor 610. If the processor 610 needs to use the instruction or data again, it can be directly called from the memory. Repeated accesses are avoided, the waiting time of the processor 610 is reduced, and the efficiency of the system is improved.
  • the processor 610 may include one or more interfaces.
  • the interface may include an integrated circuit (inter-integrated circuit, I2C) interface, an integrated circuit built-in audio (inter-integrated circuit sound, I2S) interface, a pulse code modulation (PCM) interface, and a universal asynchronous transmitter receiver/transmitter, UART) interface, mobile industry processor interface (MIPI), general-purpose input/output (GPIO) interface, subscriber identity module (SIM) interface, and / Or Universal Serial Bus (USB) interface, etc.
  • I2C integrated circuit
  • I2S integrated circuit built-in audio
  • PCM pulse code modulation
  • UART universal asynchronous transmitter receiver/transmitter
  • MIPI mobile industry processor interface
  • GPIO general-purpose input/output
  • SIM subscriber identity module
  • USB Universal Serial Bus
  • the interface connection relationship between the modules illustrated in this embodiment is merely a schematic description, and does not constitute a structural limitation of the electronic device 100.
  • the electronic device 100 may also adopt different interface connection modes in the foregoing embodiments, or a combination of multiple interface connection modes.
  • the charging management module 640 is used to receive charging input from the charger.
  • the charger can be a wireless charger or a wired charger.
  • the charging management module 640 may receive the charging input of the wired charger through the USB interface 630.
  • the charging management module 640 may receive the wireless charging input through the wireless charging coil of the electronic device 100. While the charging management module 640 charges the battery 642, it can also supply power to the electronic device through the power management module 641.
  • the power management module 641 is used to connect the battery 642, the charging management module 640 and the processor 610.
  • the power management module 641 receives input from the battery 642 and/or the charge management module 640, and supplies power to the processor 610, internal memory 621, external memory, display screen 694, camera 693, and wireless communication module 660.
  • the power management module 641 can also be used to monitor parameters such as battery capacity, battery cycle times, and battery health status (leakage, impedance).
  • the power management module 641 may also be provided in the processor 610.
  • the power management module 641 and the charging management module 640 may also be provided in the same device.
  • the wireless communication function of the electronic device 100 can be realized by the antenna 1, the antenna 2, the mobile communication module 650, the wireless communication module 660, the modem processor, and the baseband processor.
  • the antenna 1 and the antenna 2 are used to transmit and receive electromagnetic wave signals.
  • Each antenna in the electronic device 100 can be used to cover a single or multiple communication frequency bands. Different antennas can also be reused to improve antenna utilization.
  • antenna 1 can be multiplexed as a diversity antenna of a wireless local area network.
  • the antenna can be used in combination with a tuning switch.
  • the mobile communication module 650 may provide a wireless communication solution including 2G/3G/4G/5G and the like applied to the electronic device 100.
  • the mobile communication module 650 may include at least one filter, switch, power amplifier, low noise amplifier (LNA), and so on.
  • the mobile communication module 650 can receive electromagnetic waves from the antenna 1, filter and amplify the received electromagnetic waves, and transmit them to the modem processor for demodulation.
  • the mobile communication module 650 can also amplify the signal modulated by the modem processor, and convert it into electromagnetic wave radiation via the antenna 1.
  • at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 650 may be provided in the processor 610.
  • at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 650 and at least part of the modules of the processor 610 may be provided in the same device.
  • the modem processor may include a modulator and a demodulator.
  • the modulator is used to modulate the low frequency baseband signal to be sent into a medium and high frequency signal.
  • the demodulator is used to demodulate the received electromagnetic wave signal into a low-frequency baseband signal. Then the demodulator transmits the demodulated low-frequency baseband signal to the baseband processor for processing.
  • the low-frequency baseband signal is processed by the baseband processor and then passed to the application processor.
  • the application processor outputs sound signals through audio equipment (not limited to the speaker 670A, the receiver 670B, etc.), or displays images or videos through the display screen 694.
  • the modem processor may be an independent device. In other embodiments, the modem processor may be independent of the processor 610 and be provided in the same device as the mobile communication module 650 or other functional modules.
  • the wireless communication module 660 can provide applications on the electronic device 100 including wireless local area networks (WLAN) (such as wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi) networks), bluetooth (BT), and global navigation satellites.
  • WLAN wireless local area networks
  • BT wireless fidelity
  • GNSS global navigation satellite system
  • FM frequency modulation
  • NFC near field communication technology
  • infrared technology infrared, IR
  • the wireless communication module 660 may be one or more devices integrating at least one communication processing module.
  • the wireless communication module 660 receives electromagnetic waves via the antenna 2, frequency modulates and filters the electromagnetic wave signals, and sends the processed signals to the processor 610.
  • the wireless communication module 660 may also receive a signal to be sent from the processor 610, perform frequency modulation, amplify, and convert it into electromagnetic waves to radiate through the antenna 2.
  • the antenna 1 of the electronic device 100 is coupled with the mobile communication module 650, and the antenna 2 is coupled with the wireless communication module 660, so that the electronic device 100 can communicate with the network and other devices through wireless communication technology.
  • the wireless communication technologies may include global system for mobile communications (GSM), general packet radio service (GPRS), code division multiple access (CDMA), broadband Code division multiple access (wideband code division multiple access, WCDMA), time-division code division multiple access (TD-SCDMA), long term evolution (LTE), BT, GNSS, WLAN, NFC , FM, and/or IR technology, etc.
  • the GNSS may include global positioning system (GPS), global navigation satellite system (GLONASS), Beidou navigation satellite system (BDS), quasi-zenith satellite system (quasi -zenith satellite system, QZSS) and/or satellite-based augmentation systems (SBAS).
  • GPS global positioning system
  • GLONASS global navigation satellite system
  • BDS Beidou navigation satellite system
  • QZSS quasi-zenith satellite system
  • SBAS satellite-based augmentation systems
  • the electronic device 100 implements a display function through a GPU, a display screen 694, and an application processor.
  • the GPU is a microprocessor for image processing, connected to the display 694 and the application processor.
  • the GPU is used to perform mathematical and geometric calculations for graphics rendering.
  • the processor 610 may include one or more GPUs, which execute program instructions to generate or change display information.
  • the display screen 694 is used to display images, videos, etc.
  • the display screen 694 is the aforementioned folding screen (such as a flexible folding screen or a multi-screen folding screen).
  • the display screen 694 includes a display panel.
  • the display panel can adopt liquid crystal display (LCD), organic light-emitting diode (OLED), active-matrix organic light-emitting diode or active-matrix organic light-emitting diode (active-matrix organic light-emitting diode).
  • LCD liquid crystal display
  • OLED organic light-emitting diode
  • active-matrix organic light-emitting diode active-matrix organic light-emitting diode
  • emitting diode AMOLED, flexible light-emitting diode (FLED), Miniled, MicroLed, Micro-oLed, quantum dot light-emitting diode (QLED), etc.
  • the electronic device 100 may implement a shooting function through an ISP, a camera 693, a video codec, a GPU, a display screen 694, and an application processor.
  • the ISP is used to process the data fed back from the camera 693. For example, when taking a picture, the shutter is opened, the light is transmitted to the photosensitive element of the camera through the lens, the light signal is converted into an electrical signal, and the photosensitive element of the camera transfers the electrical signal to the ISP for processing and is converted into an image visible to the naked eye.
  • ISP can also optimize the image noise, brightness, and skin color. ISP can also optimize the exposure, color temperature and other parameters of the shooting scene.
  • the ISP may be provided in the camera 693.
  • the camera 693 is used to capture still images or videos.
  • the object generates an optical image through the lens and projects it to the photosensitive element.
  • the photosensitive element may be a charge coupled device (CCD) or a complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistor.
  • CMOS complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor
  • the photosensitive element converts the optical signal into an electrical signal, and then transmits the electrical signal to the ISP to convert it into a digital image signal.
  • ISP outputs digital image signals to DSP for processing.
  • DSP converts digital image signals into standard RGB, YUV and other formats.
  • the electronic device 100 may include 1 or N cameras 693, and N is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • Digital signal processors are used to process digital signals. In addition to digital image signals, they can also process other digital signals. For example, when the electronic device 100 selects the frequency point, the digital signal processor is used to perform Fourier transform on the energy of the frequency point.
  • Video codecs are used to compress or decompress digital video.
  • the electronic device 100 may support one or more video codecs. In this way, the electronic device 100 can play or record videos in a variety of encoding formats, such as: moving picture experts group (MPEG) 1, MPEG2, MPEG3, MPEG4, and so on.
  • MPEG moving picture experts group
  • NPU is a neural-network (NN) computing processor.
  • NN neural-network
  • the NPU can realize applications such as intelligent cognition of the electronic device 100, such as image recognition, face recognition, voice recognition, text understanding, and so on.
  • the external memory interface 620 may be used to connect an external memory card, such as a Micro SD card, so as to expand the storage capacity of the electronic device 100.
  • the external memory card communicates with the processor 610 through the external memory interface 620 to realize the data storage function. For example, save music, video and other files in an external memory card.
  • the internal memory 621 may be used to store computer executable program code, where the executable program code includes instructions.
  • the processor 610 executes various functional applications and data processing of the electronic device 100 by running instructions stored in the internal memory 621.
  • the processor 610 may execute the instructions stored in the internal memory 621 to respond to the user's first operation or second operation on the display screen 694 (ie, the folding screen), and the display screen 684 ( That is, the folding screen) displays the corresponding display content.
  • the internal memory 621 may include a program storage area and a data storage area. Among them, the storage program area can store an operating system, at least one application program (such as a sound playback function, an image playback function, etc.) required by at least one function.
  • the data storage area can store data (such as audio data, phone book, etc.) created during the use of the electronic device 100.
  • the internal memory 621 may include a high-speed random access memory, and may also include a non-volatile memory, such as at least one magnetic disk storage device, a flash memory device, a universal flash storage (UFS), and the like.
  • the electronic device 100 can implement audio functions through an audio module 670, a speaker 670A, a receiver 670B, a microphone 670C, a headphone interface 670D, and an application processor. For example, music playback, recording, etc.
  • the audio module 670 is used to convert digital audio information into an analog audio signal for output, and is also used to convert an analog audio input into a digital audio signal.
  • the audio module 670 can also be used to encode and decode audio signals.
  • the audio module 670 may be provided in the processor 610, or some functional modules of the audio module 670 may be provided in the processor 610.
  • the speaker 670A also called “speaker”
  • the electronic device 100 can listen to music through the speaker 670A, or listen to a hands-free call.
  • the receiver 670B also called “earpiece”, is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals.
  • Microphone 670C also called “microphone” or “microphone” is used to convert sound signals into electrical signals.
  • the user can approach the microphone 670C through the mouth to make a sound, and input the sound signal into the microphone 670C.
  • the electronic device 100 may be provided with at least one microphone 670C.
  • the electronic device 100 can be provided with two microphones 670C, which can implement noise reduction functions in addition to collecting sound signals.
  • the electronic device 100 may also be provided with three, four or more microphones 670C to collect sound signals, reduce noise, identify sound sources, and realize directional recording functions.
  • the earphone interface 670D is used to connect wired earphones.
  • the earphone interface 670D may be a USB interface 630, or a 3.5mm open mobile terminal platform (OMTP) standard interface, and a cellular telecommunications industry association (cellular telecommunications industry association of the USA, CTIA) standard interface.
  • OMTP open mobile terminal platform
  • CTIA cellular telecommunications industry association
  • the pressure sensor 680A is used to sense the pressure signal and can convert the pressure signal into an electrical signal.
  • the pressure sensor 680A may be provided on the display screen 694.
  • the capacitive pressure sensor may include at least two parallel plates with conductive material.
  • the electronic device 100 may also calculate the touched position according to the detection signal of the pressure sensor 680A.
  • touch operations that act on the same touch location but have different touch operation strengths may correspond to different operation instructions. For example: when a touch operation whose intensity of the touch operation is less than the first pressure threshold is applied to the short message application icon, an instruction to view the short message is executed. When a touch operation with a touch operation intensity greater than or equal to the first pressure threshold acts on the short message application icon, an instruction to create a new short message is executed.
  • the gyro sensor 680B may be used to determine the movement posture of the electronic device 100.
  • the angular velocity of the electronic device 100 around three axes i.e., x, y, and z axes
  • the gyro sensor 680B can be used for image stabilization.
  • the gyro sensor 680B detects the shake angle of the electronic device 100, calculates the distance that the lens module needs to compensate according to the angle, and allows the lens to counteract the shake of the electronic device 100 through a reverse movement to achieve anti-shake.
  • the gyro sensor 680B can also be used for navigation and somatosensory game scenes.
  • the display screen 694 of the electronic device 100 can be folded to form multiple screens.
  • Each screen may include a gyroscope sensor 680B for measuring the orientation of the corresponding screen (ie, the direction vector of the orientation).
  • the electronic device 100 can determine the angle between adjacent screens according to the measured angle change of the orientation of each screen.
  • the air pressure sensor 680C is used to measure air pressure.
  • the electronic device 100 calculates the altitude based on the air pressure value measured by the air pressure sensor 680C, and assists positioning and navigation.
  • the magnetic sensor 680D includes a Hall sensor.
  • the electronic device 100 can use the magnetic sensor 680D to detect the opening and closing of the flip holster.
  • the electronic device 100 when the electronic device 100 is a flip machine, the electronic device 100 can detect the opening and closing of the flip according to the magnetic sensor 680D.
  • features such as automatic unlocking of the flip cover are set.
  • the acceleration sensor 680E can detect the magnitude of the acceleration of the electronic device 100 in various directions (generally three-axis). When the electronic device 100 is stationary, the magnitude and direction of gravity can be detected. It can also be used to identify the posture of electronic devices, and used in applications such as horizontal and vertical screen switching, pedometers and so on. It should be noted that in this embodiment of the present application, the display screen 694 of the electronic device 100 can be folded to form multiple screens. Each screen may include an acceleration sensor 680E for measuring the orientation of the corresponding screen (that is, the direction vector of the orientation).
  • the electronic device 100 can measure the distance by infrared or laser. In some embodiments, when shooting a scene, the electronic device 100 can use the distance sensor 680F to measure the distance to achieve fast focusing.
  • the proximity light sensor 680G may include, for example, a light emitting diode (LED) and a light detector such as a photodiode.
  • the light emitting diode may be an infrared light emitting diode.
  • the electronic device 100 emits infrared light to the outside through the light emitting diode.
  • the electronic device 100 uses a photodiode to detect infrared reflected light from nearby objects. When sufficient reflected light is detected, it can be determined that there is an object near the electronic device 100. When insufficient reflected light is detected, the electronic device 100 can determine that there is no object near the electronic device 100.
  • the electronic device 100 can use the proximity light sensor 680G to detect that the user holds the electronic device 100 close to the ear to talk, so as to automatically turn off the screen to save power.
  • the proximity light sensor 680G can also be used in leather case mode, and the pocket mode will automatically unlock and lock the screen.
  • the ambient light sensor 680L is used to sense the brightness of the ambient light.
  • the electronic device 100 can adaptively adjust the brightness of the display screen 694 according to the perceived brightness of the ambient light.
  • the ambient light sensor 680L can also be used to automatically adjust the white balance when taking pictures.
  • the ambient light sensor 680L can also cooperate with the proximity light sensor 680G to detect whether the electronic device 100 is in the pocket to prevent accidental touch.
  • the fingerprint sensor 680H is used to collect fingerprints.
  • the electronic device 100 can use the collected fingerprint characteristics to realize fingerprint unlocking, access application locks, fingerprint photographs, fingerprint answering calls, etc.
  • the temperature sensor 680J is used to detect temperature.
  • the electronic device 100 uses the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 680J to execute a temperature processing strategy. For example, when the temperature reported by the temperature sensor 680J exceeds a threshold value, the electronic device 100 reduces the performance of the processor located near the temperature sensor 680J, so as to reduce power consumption and implement thermal protection.
  • the electronic device 100 when the temperature is lower than another threshold, the electronic device 100 heats the battery 642 to avoid abnormal shutdown of the electronic device 100 due to low temperature.
  • the electronic device 100 boosts the output voltage of the battery 642 to avoid abnormal shutdown caused by low temperature.
  • Touch sensor 680K also known as "touch panel”.
  • the touch sensor 680K can be arranged on the display screen 694, and the touch screen is composed of the touch sensor 680K and the display screen 694, which is also called a “touch screen”.
  • the touch sensor 680K is used to detect touch operations acting on or near it.
  • the touch sensor can pass the detected touch operation to the application processor to determine the type of touch event.
  • the visual output related to the touch operation can be provided through the display screen 694.
  • the touch sensor 680K may also be disposed on the surface of the electronic device 100, which is different from the position of the display screen 694.
  • the bone conduction sensor 680M can acquire vibration signals.
  • the bone conduction sensor 680M can obtain the vibration signal of the vibrating bone mass of the human voice.
  • the bone conduction sensor 680M can also contact the human pulse and receive blood pressure pulse signals.
  • the bone conduction sensor 680M may also be provided in the earphone, combined with the bone conduction earphone.
  • the audio module 670 can parse the voice signal based on the vibration signal of the vibrating bone block of the voice obtained by the bone conduction sensor 680M, and realize the voice function.
  • the application processor may analyze the heart rate information based on the blood pressure beating signal obtained by the bone conduction sensor 680M, and realize the heart rate detection function.
  • the button 690 includes a power button, a volume button and so on.
  • the button 690 may be a mechanical button. It can also be a touch button.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive key input, and generate key signal input related to user settings and function control of the electronic device 100.
  • the motor 691 can generate vibration prompts.
  • the motor 691 can be used for incoming call vibrating prompts, and can also be used for touch vibration feedback.
  • touch operations applied to different applications can correspond to different vibration feedback effects.
  • Acting on touch operations in different areas of the display screen 694, the motor 691 can also correspond to different vibration feedback effects.
  • Different application scenarios for example: time reminding, receiving information, alarm clock, games, etc.
  • the touch vibration feedback effect can also support customization.
  • the indicator 692 can be an indicator light, which can be used to indicate the charging status, power change, and can also be used to indicate messages, missed calls, notifications, and so on.
  • the SIM card interface 695 is used to connect to the SIM card.
  • the SIM card can be inserted into the SIM card interface 695 or pulled out from the SIM card interface 695 to achieve contact and separation with the electronic device 100.
  • the electronic device 100 may support 1 or N SIM card interfaces, and N is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • the SIM card interface 695 can support Nano SIM cards, Micro SIM cards, SIM cards, etc.
  • the same SIM card interface 695 can insert multiple cards at the same time. The types of the multiple cards can be the same or different.
  • the SIM card interface 695 can also be compatible with different types of SIM cards.
  • the SIM card interface 695 can also be compatible with external memory cards.
  • the electronic device 100 interacts with the network through the SIM card to implement functions such as call and data communication.
  • the electronic device 100 adopts an eSIM, that is, an embedded SIM card.
  • the eSIM card can be embedded in the electronic device 100 and cannot be separated from the electronic device 100.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides an application display method. This method can be applied in the case where the folding screen of the above-mentioned electronic device 100 is unfolded. For example, as shown in FIG. 7C, the electronic device 100 is in an unfolded state.
  • the application display method provided in the embodiment of the present application will be described.
  • the application display method provided by the embodiment of the present application may include S701-S703.
  • S701 The electronic device 100 displays the first interface of the first application on the folding screen.
  • the electronic device 100 displays the first interface of the first application on the folding screen. Specifically, the electronic device 100 displays the first interface in the first display area and the second display area of the folding screen. It should be noted that in S701, the folding screen does not display the second interface of the first application.
  • the folding screen shown in FIG. 7C can be divided into a first screen 701 (corresponding to the first display area) and a second screen 702 (corresponding to the second display area) along the folding edge.
  • the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 7C may display the first interface 703 on the first screen 701 and the second screen 702 of the folding screen, and no other interfaces (such as the second interface) may be displayed. That is, the electronic device 100 may display the above-mentioned first interface in a full-screen display manner as shown in FIG. 5 or FIG. 7C.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the first interface in the manner shown in FIG. 4(a) or FIG. 4(b). In the embodiment of the present application, the specific manner in which the electronic device 100 displays the first interface is not limited.
  • the method of the embodiment of the present application will be described by taking the electronic device 100 displaying the first interface in the full-screen display mode shown in FIG. 5 or FIG. 7C as an example.
  • the above-mentioned first interface may be the homepage of the first application.
  • the first interface may be the first interface 501 shown in FIG. 5.
  • the first interface 501 is the homepage of the "Toutiao" application.
  • the electronic device 100 displaying the first interface of the first application may include the following cases (1) and (2).
  • the homepage of the above-mentioned first application is that after the electronic device 100 exits the first application (that is, stops displaying the interface of the first application on the folding screen, and stops running the first application in the background), it responds to the user's request to the electronic device
  • a click operation (such as a single click operation) of the icon of the first application in the main interface (ie desktop) of 100 is displayed.
  • the home page of the first application mentioned above is displayed for the first time in response to a user's click operation (such as a single click operation) on the icon of the first application in the main interface (ie desktop) of the electronic device 100 after the electronic device 100 is turned on. .
  • the electronic device 100 may display the first interface 501 shown in FIG. 5 in response to a user's click operation (such as a single click operation) on the icon of the "headline" application in the main interface (ie desktop) of the electronic device 100.
  • a user's click operation such as a single click operation
  • the electronic device 100 may display the home page of the first application in response to a user's click operation (such as a click operation) of the "return" button in the next level interface of the home page of the first application.
  • a user's click operation such as a click operation
  • the "Typhoon Mangkhut” news interface 703 shown in FIG. 7C is the electronic device 100 responding to the user's click operation (such as a single click operation) on the "Typhoon Mangkhut” news item 502 in the home page 501 of the "Toutiao” application shown in FIG. ), the next level interface of the home page 501 of the displayed "Toutiao” application.
  • the electronic device 100 may respond to a user's click operation (such as a click operation) on the "return" button 704 in the "Typhoon Mangosteen" news interface 703 shown in FIG. 7C, and display the home page 501 of the "Toutiao” application shown in FIG. 5 .
  • the above-mentioned first interface is another interface of the first application.
  • the other interface is any interface in the interface of the first application except the home page of the first application.
  • the first interface may be the first interface 703 shown in FIG. 7C, and the first interface 703 is the "Typhoon Mangkhut” news interface 703.
  • the "Typhoon Mangkhut” news interface 703 is not the "Headline” application, not the homepage.
  • the electronic device 100 receives a user's first operation on the folding screen, and the first operation is used to trigger the folding screen to display two interfaces of the first application in dual windows.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive the first operation of the user on the folding screen when the first interface is displayed on the folding screen.
  • the folding screen displays the interface of the first application in dual windows, which may specifically be: the folding screen simultaneously displays two interfaces of the first application in two display areas.
  • a display area displays an interface of the first application.
  • the interface displayed in each display area can be the same or different.
  • the electronic device 100 In response to the first operation, the electronic device 100 displays the first content of the first interface in the first display area of the folding screen, and displays the second interface of the first application in the second display area of the folding screen.
  • the first content may be the entire content of the first interface or part of the content of the first interface.
  • the first content is the entire content of the first interface as an example for description.
  • first display area and the second display area are both part of the display area of the folding screen. There is no overlap between the first display area and the second display area.
  • the first display area is a display area corresponding to the first screen
  • the second display area is a display area corresponding to the second screen.
  • the folding edge of the folding screen takes the folding edge of the folding screen as the boundary, when the user faces the unfolded folding screen, the right side of the folding edge on the folding screen is the first display area, and the left side of the folding edge on the folding screen is the second display area;
  • the left side of the folding edge on the folding screen is the first display area, and the right side of the folding edge on the folding screen is the second display area.
  • the dividing line A of the first display area and the second display area coincides with the folding edge of the folding screen of the electronic device 100.
  • the first display area corresponds to the first screen
  • the second display area corresponds to the second screen.
  • the sizes (including width and height) of the above-mentioned first display area and the second display area may be pre-configured in the electronic device 100.
  • the width and height of the first display area and the second display area may be set in the electronic device 100 by the user.
  • the size of the first display area and the size of the second display area may be the same or different.
  • the size of the first display area and the size of the second display area are the same.
  • the first display area and the second display area are bounded by the dividing line B
  • the height of the first display area is the same as the height of the second display area
  • the width of the first display area is the same as that of the second display area.
  • the width of the display area is the length L.
  • the size of the first display area and the size of the second display area are different.
  • the first display area and the second display area are bounded by the dividing line C, and the first display area is smaller than the second display area.
  • the size of the first display area and the size of the second display area are different.
  • the first display area and the second display area are bounded by the dividing line D, and the first display area is larger than the second display area.
  • the first screen when the folding screen is in the folded state, the first screen is used as the main screen to display the main interface or application interface (such as the first interface or the second content) of the mobile phone, and the second screen may be black.
  • the first screen in response to the folding screen transitioning from the expanded state to the folded state, the first screen may display the above-mentioned first interface or second content.
  • the first screen in response to the folding screen transitioning from the expanded state to the folded state, displays the first interface as an example.
  • the first display area of the folding screen displays the first interface; when the folding screen is in the folded state, the first screen displays the first interface.
  • the display area corresponding to the first screen may be different from the first display area. In this way, the first interface displayed on the first display area when the folding screen is in the expanded state may have a different interface layout from the first interface displayed on the first screen when the folding screen is in the folded state.
  • the electronic device may display the first interface from the interface layout adapting to the first display area to the interface layout adapting to the dynamically changing image of the first screen until the first screen.
  • the angle between the first screen and the second screen is equal to the preset angle threshold, and the electronic device displays the first interface on the first screen.
  • the electronic device displays the first interface on the first screen.
  • the dividing line between the first display area and the second display area is the folding side
  • the right side of the folding side is the first display area
  • the left side of the folding side is the second
  • the display area is taken as an example to describe the method of the embodiment of the present application.
  • the first display area corresponds to the first screen 701 shown in FIG. 7C
  • the second display area corresponds to the first screen 702 shown in FIG. 7C.
  • the above-mentioned first operation may include a first sliding operation and a second sliding operation.
  • the above-mentioned first sliding operation may be a left-to-right sliding operation input by the user on the first screen of the folding screen
  • the second sliding operation may be the user sliding on the second screen of the folding screen.
  • the input sliding operation from right to left.
  • the above-mentioned second sliding operation may be a sliding operation 705a input by the user (one finger of the user, such as the thumb of the left hand) on the second screen 702, and the first sliding operation may be the user (the other finger of the user, such as the thumb of the right hand) in the second screen 702.
  • the above-mentioned first sliding operation may be an arc-shaped sliding operation from right to left input by the user on the first screen of the folding screen
  • the second sliding operation may be the user's sliding operation on the folding screen.
  • the arc sliding operation from left to right input on the second screen.
  • the radius of the arc of the arc sliding operation is greater than the preset radius threshold.
  • the preset radius threshold may be 2 centimeters (cm), 2.5 cm, 3 cm, or 3.5 cm.
  • the preset radius threshold may be obtained by counting the radius of the sliding track when a large number of users input an arc-shaped sliding operation, and the preset radius threshold may be pre-configured in the electronic device 100.
  • the preset radius threshold may be configured by the user in the electronic device.
  • the above-mentioned first interface may be an arc-shaped sliding operation 802a input by the user (a finger of the user, such as a left thumb) on the second screen 702 shown in (a) in FIG. 8A
  • the first sliding operation may be the user ( The user's other finger, such as the thumb of the right hand, inputs an arc-shaped sliding operation 802b on the first screen 701 shown in (a) of FIG. 8A.
  • the above-mentioned first operation may include an arc-shaped sliding operation 802a and an arc-shaped sliding operation 802b.
  • the electronic device currently displays interface a.
  • these electronic devices may display interface b.
  • the interface b may be an interface higher than the interface a.
  • the interface b may be the previous interface displayed before the electronic device displays the interface a.
  • the aforementioned sliding operation drawn from the left edge or the right edge of the display screen of the electronic device is referred to as a back operation.
  • the first sliding operation and the second sliding operation in the embodiment of the present application may be sliding operations starting from a non-edge area of the folding screen.
  • the first sliding operation and the second sliding operation are arc sliding operations
  • the arc of the sliding track corresponding to the arc sliding operation and the sliding corresponding to the back operation The trajectory is different.
  • the above-mentioned first sliding operation may be a first preset shape sliding gesture input by the user on the first screen
  • the second sliding operation may be a second sliding gesture input by the user on the second screen.
  • Swipe gestures with preset shapes For example, the sliding gesture of the first preset shape or the sliding gesture of the second preset shape may be an S-shaped sliding gesture, a circular or elliptical sliding gesture, or a triangular sliding gesture.
  • the sliding gesture of the first preset shape and the sliding gesture of the second preset shape may be the same or different.
  • the above-mentioned first operation may be a sliding gesture of the third preset shape input by the user on the folding screen.
  • the above-mentioned first operation may be a sliding gesture of a third preset shape input by the user around the folding edge of the folding screen, that is, the first operation passes through the folding edge of the folding screen.
  • the sliding gesture of the third preset shape may be an S-shaped sliding gesture, a circular or elliptical sliding gesture, or a triangular sliding gesture.
  • the aforementioned first operation may be the user's first preset folding operation on the folding screen.
  • the first preset folding operation may include: the angle between the first screen and the second screen changes from large to small within the preset angle range; and the angle between the first screen and the second screen is The preset included angle range changes from small to large.
  • the above-mentioned first operation may be: the user first controls the angle between the first screen and the second screen to change from large to small within the preset angle range, and then controls the angle between the first screen and the second screen to be The preset included angle range changes from small to large.
  • the above-mentioned first operation may include folding operations 902a and 902b shown in (a) of FIG.
  • the folding operations 902a and 902b are used to control the angle between the first screen and the second screen from large to small within a preset angle range.
  • the angle between the first screen and the second screen changes from ⁇ 1 shown in (a) of FIG. 9 to ⁇ 2 shown in (b) of FIG. 9, where ⁇ 1> ⁇ 2.
  • the folding operations 903a and 903b are used to control the angle between the first screen and the second screen from small to large within a preset angle range.
  • the angle between the first screen and the second screen is changed from ⁇ 2 shown in (b) of FIG. 9 to ⁇ 3 shown in (c) of FIG. 9, where ⁇ 2 ⁇ 3.
  • ⁇ 1 and ⁇ 3 may be the same or different.
  • the above first interface is another interface of the first application, and the other interface is any interface of the first application except the home page of the first application.
  • the above second interface may be the home page of the first application; or, the above second interface may be an interface higher than the first interface.
  • the above-mentioned second interface may be the homepage of the first application.
  • the home page of the “hot spot” application is the interface 501 shown in FIG. 5.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the interface shown in (a) in FIG. 7D.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the first interface 703 (the same as the display content of the first interface 703 shown in FIG.
  • the second interface 706 is displayed in the second display area (ie, the second screen 702) (the same as the display content of the home page of the "hotspot" application shown in FIG. 5).
  • the second interface may be an interface higher than the first interface.
  • different interfaces of the same application can be divided into upper and lower levels.
  • the electronic device 100 can display the interface to be displayed in the display area of the display screen according to the hierarchical relationship between the interface to be displayed and the displayed interface.
  • different interfaces of the same application may correspond to the same activity (Activity), or may correspond to different activities.
  • these interfaces can correspond to the same level.
  • different interfaces correspond to different activity activities, these interfaces correspond to different levels.
  • the interface can call another interface.
  • the actively called interface corresponds to the same activity as the called interface
  • the actively called interface and the called interface can correspond to the same level; when the actively called interface corresponds to a different activity from the called interface, the called interface is active The next level of the called interface.
  • the actively called interface may be the interface 501 in FIG. 5, the called interface may be the interface 703 in FIG. 7C, the interface 703 and the interface 501 correspond to different activities, and the interface 703 is the next level interface of the interface 501 ,
  • the interface 501 is an interface one level above the interface 703.
  • the process of the electronic device 100 calling between interfaces can be implemented through a first-in-last-out stack. For example, when the electronic device 100 calls and displays interface 1, interface 1 is pushed into the stack; when interface 1 calls interface 2, interface 2 is pushed into the stack; when the user returns from the current interface 2 to interface 1, the current interface 2 is out Stack.
  • the electronic device 100 detects a user's return operation on the current interface (for example, the user's operation on the "return" button shown in FIG. 7C), in response to this operation, it returns to the interface that previously actively called the current interface.
  • the electronic device 100 is preset with a hierarchical relationship between different activities.
  • the level of the interface corresponding to the activity with a higher level is also higher, and the level of the interface corresponding to the activity with a lower level is also lower.
  • the level of Activity corresponding to the information list interface of follow, Recommendation, Hotspot, Video, and Toutiao Number is higher than the level of Activity corresponding to the information detail page (the detail page is an interface); follow, recommend
  • the level of the information list interface of, hotspots, videos, and headlines is also higher than the level of the detailed information page.
  • the interface 501 shown in FIG. 5 is the first interface 703 shown in FIG. 7C, the first interface shown in (a) in FIG. 8A, or the first interface shown in (a) in FIG.
  • An interface 901 is the upper level interface.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the interface shown in (a) in FIG. 7D.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the first interface 703 (the same as the display content of the first interface 703 shown in FIG. 7C) in the first display area of the folding screen (ie, the first screen 701) ), the second interface 706 is displayed in the second display area (ie, the second screen 702).
  • the display content of the second interface 706 is the same as that of the interface 501 shown in FIG. 5, and both are the upper level interface of the first interface 703 shown in FIG. 7C.
  • the electronic device 100 may display The interface shown in (b).
  • the electronic device 100 can display the first content 801 of the first interface in the first display area (ie, the first screen 701) of the folding screen, and in the second display area (ie, the second screen) 702)
  • the second interface 803 is displayed.
  • the display content of the second interface 803 is the same as that of the interface 501 shown in FIG. 5, and both are the upper level interface of the first interface 801 shown in (a) in FIG. 8A.
  • the electronic device 100 can display the interface shown in (c) of 9.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the first content 904 of the first interface in the first display area of the folding screen, and display the second interface 905 in the second display area.
  • the display content of the second interface 905 is the same as that of the interface 501 shown in FIG. 5, and both are the upper level interface of the first interface 904 shown in (b) of FIG. 9.
  • the above-mentioned second interface may be an interface corresponding to the previous activity item of the activity item corresponding to the first interface in the activity record of the first application.
  • the electronic device 100 responds to the user's click operation on the icon of the first application in the main interface (ie desktop) of the electronic device 100, and after displaying the home page of the first application, the activity record of the first application can be generated (Activity record), and save the record items for the homepage in the activity record.
  • the electronic device 100 can save the record items of the other interface in the activity record of the first application.
  • the electronic device 100 can record the activity record of each application through a first-in-last-out stack (referred to as an activity record stack).
  • the pointer of the activity record stack of the first application points to the record item at the top of the stack, and when the electronic device 100 displays the interface of the first application, the interface corresponding to the record item pointed to by the pointer is displayed.
  • the electronic device 100 responds to the user's click operation on the icon of the first application in the main interface (ie desktop) of the electronic device 100, and displays the home page of the first application, the electronic device 100 can generate (a) in FIG. 8C ) Shows the activity record stack.
  • the activity record stack shown in (a) in FIG. 8C includes record items of interface 1 (that is, the home page of the first application), and the pointer points to the record items of interface 1.
  • the electronic device 100 can display the interface 2, and press the record item corresponding to the interface 2 in the activity record stack to obtain the activity record stack shown in (b) in FIG. 8C.
  • the pointer points to the record item of the interface 2.
  • the electronic device 100 may display interface 1, and press the record item corresponding to interface 1 in the activity record stack to obtain the result in FIG. 8C
  • the activity record stack shown in (c) In the activity record stack shown in (c) in FIG. 8C, the pointer points to the record item of interface 1 at the top of the stack.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the interface 3, and press the record item corresponding to the interface 3 in the activity record stack to obtain the activity record stack shown in (d) in FIG. 8C.
  • the pointer points to the record item of interface 3 at the top of the stack.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the interface 4, and press the record item corresponding to the interface 4 into the activity record stack to obtain the activity record stack shown in (e) in FIG. 8C.
  • the pointer points to the record item of the interface 4 at the top of the stack.
  • the electronic device 100 may move the stack top pointer of the activity record stack of the first application downward so that the pointer points to the next record item on the top of the stack.
  • the interface corresponding to the record item pointed to by the pointer is the second interface
  • the record item at the top of the stack is the first interface.
  • the identification of the corresponding interface may be stored in the activity item of the above activity record stack.
  • the above first interface is the home page of the first application
  • the electronic device 100 only saves the activity items of the home page of the first application in the activity record of the first application.
  • the electronic device 100 only saves the activity items of the home page of the first application in the activity record of the first application.
  • the activity items of interface 1 are included in the activity record stack.
  • the electronic device 100 in response to the first operation, cannot find activity items on other interfaces except the first interface from the activity record of the first application.
  • the electronic device 100 may display first prompt information, which is used to prompt that the electronic device 100 cannot currently display the first in multiple windows.
  • Multiple interfaces of the application For example, take the first interface as the homepage of the "hotspot” application shown in FIG. 5 as an example. Wherein, the electronic device 100 displays the home page of the "hot spot” application shown in FIG. 5 in the above situation (1).
  • the electronic device 100 may display the first prompt information 805 shown in FIG. 8D.
  • the first prompt message 805 is used to prompt that the electronic device 100 cannot currently display in dual windows.
  • the electronic device 100 may display any interface of the next level of the above-mentioned first interface (that is, the home page of the first application). That is, the second interface can be any interface on the next level of the home page of the first application.
  • the electronic device 100 may be preset in the above case (1), and in response to the first operation, the second interface to be displayed by the electronic device 100 is to be displayed.
  • the second interface may be any interface other than the homepage in the interface of the first application.
  • the above-mentioned second interface may be the same as the first interface. That is, the second interface can also be the homepage of the first application.
  • the electronic device 100 saves the activity items of other interfaces of the first application in the activity record of the first application.
  • the aforementioned second interface may be an interface corresponding to the previous activity item of the activity item corresponding to the first interface in the activity record of the first application.
  • the electronic device 100 in response to the user's first operation, can switch the window mode of the folding screen from the single window mode to the dual window mode, and the folding screen displays the first interface of the first application in dual windows.
  • the content and the second interface that is, the folding screen, simultaneously displays the two interfaces of the first application in the two display areas.
  • the folding screen can present more display content of the first application to the user, can increase the amount of information displayed on the folding screen at the same time, and improve the utilization of the display area of the folding screen.
  • the method of the embodiment of the present application may further include S704-S705.
  • the electronic device 100 receives a second operation of the user on the folding screen, and the first operation is used to trigger the folding screen to display an interface of the first application in a single window.
  • the electronic device does not display the second interface of the first application on the folding screen.
  • step S705A after step S704, the method of the embodiment of the present application may further include S705A.
  • S705A In response to the second operation, the electronic device 100 displays the second content of the second interface on the folding screen.
  • the second content may be the entire content of the second interface or part of the content of the second interface.
  • the second content is the entire content of the second interface as an example for description.
  • the electronic device does not display the first interface of the first application on the folding screen.
  • the electronic device 100 displays the first interface of the first application in response to the second operation as an example to describe the method of the embodiment of the present application.
  • the electronic device 100 displays the first interface of the first application on the folding screen, which may specifically be: the electronic device 100 displays the first interface on the first and second screens of the folding screen, but does not display other interfaces (such as the second interface).
  • the folding screen shown in (b) of FIG. 7D can be divided into a first screen 701 and a second screen 702 along the folding edge.
  • the electronic device 100 shown in (b) of FIG. 7D may display the first interface 703 on the first screen 701 and the second screen 702 of the folding screen.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the first interface or the second interface in the manner shown in FIG. 4(a) or FIG. 4(b).
  • the specific manner in which the electronic device 100 displays the first interface or the second interface is not limited.
  • the second operation is different from the above-mentioned first operation.
  • the aforementioned second operation may include a third sliding operation and a fourth sliding operation.
  • the above-mentioned third sliding operation may be a right-to-left sliding operation input by the user on the first screen of the folding screen
  • the fourth sliding operation may be a user sliding on the second screen of the folding screen. The input sliding operation from left to right.
  • the fourth sliding operation may be the sliding operation 707a input by the user (the user's finger, such as the left thumb) on the second screen 702 shown in (a) in FIG. 7D
  • the third sliding operation may be the user (user The other finger, such as the thumb of the right hand, enters the sliding operation 707b in the first screen 701 shown in (a) of FIG. 7D.
  • the above-mentioned second operation may include a sliding operation 707a and a sliding operation 707b.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the first interface 703 shown in (b) in FIG. 7D.
  • the aforementioned third sliding operation may be an arc-shaped sliding operation from left to right input by the user on the first screen of the folding screen
  • the fourth sliding operation may be the user's sliding operation on the folding screen.
  • the arc sliding operation from right to left input on the second screen.
  • the radius of the arc of the arc sliding operation is greater than the preset radius threshold.
  • the fourth sliding operation may be an arc-shaped sliding operation 804a input by the user (a finger of the user, such as a left thumb) on the second screen 702 shown in (b) of FIG. 8A
  • the third sliding operation may be the user (The user's other finger, such as the thumb of the right hand) an arc-shaped sliding operation 804b entered in (b) the first screen 701 in FIG. 8A.
  • the aforementioned second operation may include an arc-shaped sliding operation 804a and an arc-shaped sliding operation 804b.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the first interface 703 shown in (b) of FIG. 7D.
  • the third sliding operation and the fourth sliding operation in the embodiment of the present application may be sliding operations starting from a non-edge area of the folding screen.
  • the first operation may be sliding operation 707a and sliding operation 707b, or arc sliding operation 804a and arc sliding operation 804b;
  • the second operation may be sliding operation 705a and sliding operation 705b, Or the arc sliding operation 802a and the arc sliding operation 802b.
  • the above-mentioned third sliding operation may be a sliding gesture with a fourth preset shape input by the user on the first screen
  • the fourth sliding operation may be a fifth sliding operation input by the user on the second screen.
  • Swipe gestures with preset shapes For example, the sliding gesture of the fourth preset shape or the sliding gesture of the fifth preset shape may be an S-shaped sliding gesture, a circular or elliptical sliding gesture, or a triangular sliding gesture.
  • the sliding gesture of the fourth preset shape and the sliding gesture of the fifth preset shape may be the same or different.
  • the second operation formed by the combination of the third sliding operation and the fourth sliding operation is different from the first operation formed by the combination of the first sliding operation and the second sliding operation described above.
  • the above-mentioned second operation may be a sliding gesture of the sixth preset shape input by the user on the folding screen.
  • the above-mentioned second operation may be a sliding gesture of a sixth preset shape input by the user around the folding edge of the folding screen, that is, the first operation passes through the folding edge of the folding screen.
  • the sliding gesture of the sixth preset shape may be an S-shaped sliding gesture, a circular or elliptical sliding gesture, or a triangular sliding gesture.
  • the sixth preset shape is different from the third preset shape described above.
  • the above-mentioned second operation may be a second preset folding operation of the user on the folding screen.
  • the second preset folding operation may include: the angle between the first screen and the second screen changes from small to larger within the preset angle range; and the angle between the first screen and the second screen is The range of the preset included angle changes from large to small.
  • the above-mentioned first operation can be: the user first controls the angle between the first screen and the second screen to change from small to large within the preset angle range, and then controls the angle between the first screen and the second screen to be The range of the preset included angle changes from large to small.
  • the above-mentioned first preset folding operation may include: the angle between the first screen and the second screen changes from small to large within the preset angle range ; And the angle between the first screen and the second screen changes from large to small within the preset angle range. That is, the above-mentioned first operation can be: the user first controls the angle between the first screen and the second screen to change from small to large within the preset angle range, and then controls the angle between the first screen and the second screen to be The range of the preset included angle changes from large to small.
  • the second preset folding operation may include: the angle between the first screen and the second screen changes from large to small within the preset angle; and between the first screen and the second screen The included angle of is changed from small to large within the preset angle range. That is, the above-mentioned first operation may be: the user first controls the angle between the first screen and the second screen to change from large to small within the preset angle range, and then controls the angle between the first screen and the second screen to be The preset included angle range changes from small to large.
  • the first operation and the second operation may be the same, that is, the first preset folding operation is the same as the second operation.
  • the two preset folding operations are the same.
  • both the first preset folding operation and the second preset operation may be: the user first controls the angle between the first screen and the second screen to change from small to large within the preset angle, and then controls the first The angle between the screen and the second screen changes from large to small within the preset angle range.
  • both the first preset folding operation and the second preset operation may be: the user first controls the angle between the first screen and the second screen from large to small within the preset angle, and then controls the first The angle between the screen and the second screen changes from small to large within the preset angle range.
  • the electronic device 100 displays the first interface in a single window of the folding screen, in response to the aforementioned first preset folding operation (ie, the second preset folding operation), the electronic device 100 may display the first interface of the first interface in dual windows. Content and second interface.
  • the electronic device 100 can display the first content and the second interface of the first interface in dual windows, in response to the aforementioned second preset folding operation (that is, the first preset folding operation), the electronic device 100 can display the first content in a single window.
  • the above-mentioned second operation may be a left drag operation or a right drag operation on the dividing line of the first display area and the second display area by the user.
  • the dividing line of the first display area 1003 and the second display area 1004 of the folding screen is 1001.
  • the electronic device 100 displays the first content of the first interface in the first display area, and displays the second interface in the second display area . Then, in response to the user's drag operation of the aforementioned dividing line to the left, the electronic device 100 may display the first interface in a single window. In response to the user's rightward drag operation of the aforementioned dividing line, the electronic device 100 may display the second interface in a single window. For example, in response to the user's drag operation of the dividing line shown in FIG. 10 to the left, the electronic device 100 may display the first interface shown in (a) of FIG. 9. In response to the user's rightward drag operation of the dividing line shown in FIG. 10, the electronic device 100 may display the second interface shown in FIG.
  • the aforementioned dragging operation to the left may be a drag operation starting from the aforementioned dividing line and dragging to the left for a distance greater than a preset distance.
  • the aforementioned dragging operation to the right may be a drag operation starting from the aforementioned dividing line and dragging to the right for a distance greater than a preset distance.
  • the preset distance can be 1 cm, 2 cm, or 1.5 cm.
  • the aforementioned dragging operation to the left may be a drag operation starting from the aforementioned dividing line and dragging to the left to the left border of the folding screen.
  • the aforementioned dragging operation to the right may be a drag operation starting from the aforementioned dividing line and dragging to the right to the right border of the folding screen.
  • the electronic device 100 may display a directional drag indicator on the dividing line. For example, as shown in FIG. 10, in response to the user's finger touching the dividing line, the electronic device 100 may display a directional drag indicator 1002 on the dividing line.
  • the electronic device 100 may also display second prompt information.
  • the second prompt information is used to prompt the user to drag the dividing line to the left or right, and the electronic device can be controlled to display in a single window.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the second prompt information 1005.
  • the second prompt message 1005 may be "Hold down and drag left or right to control the phone to display in a single window!.
  • the application display method described above can also be applied to an electronic device including the vertically foldable folding screen shown in FIG. 3.
  • the method of the embodiment of the present application can be applied to the unfolded folding screen of this type of electronic device, and the folding screen is in the horizontal screen state.
  • the electronic device may display the first interface of the first application in a single window when the folding screen is expanded and in a landscape state. That is, the electronic device displays the first interface in the first display area and the second display area of the folding screen.
  • the folding screen does not display the second interface of the first application.
  • the electronic device 100 displays the first interface 1101 of the "hot spot" application in a single window in the landscape state.
  • the electronic device displays the first content of the first interface in the first display area and displays the second interface of the first application in the second display area in the horizontal screen state. That is, the two interfaces of the first application of the electronic device with dual windows.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the first "hot spot" application in a dual window.
  • the first content 1101 ie, the first interface 1101
  • the second interface 1102 of the interface is displayed in the first display area of the folding screen of the electronic device
  • the second interface 1102 is displayed in the second display area of the folding screen.
  • the method of the embodiment of the present application may further include: In response to the aforementioned second operation, the electronic device displays the first interface (and does not display the second interface) or the second content of the second interface (and does not display the first interface) in a single window in the horizontal screen state. For example, in response to the user's second operation on the electronic device 100 shown in (b) in FIG. 11A, the electronic device 100 may display the first interface 1101 shown in (a) in FIG. 11A in a single window.
  • the electronic device when a user uses an electronic device, the electronic device may be in a horizontal screen state or a vertical screen state.
  • the display screen of the electronic device (including the folding screen in the unfolded state) may include four sides, including two parallel and equal longer sides, which can be called the long sides of the display screen; among the four sides It includes two shorter sides that are parallel and equal to each other, which can be called the short sides of the display screen.
  • the long side of the display screen of the electronic device is parallel to the horizontal plane (for example, as shown in (a) in Figure 11B), that is, the angle between the long side of the display screen and the horizontal plane is 0; or
  • the angle 03 between the long side 01 and the horizontal plane 02 is less than or equal to the preset value 1 (for example, as shown in (b) in FIG. 11B).
  • the preset value 1 is less than or equal to 45°, and the specific value of the preset value 1 may be set according to actual application scenarios.
  • the preset value 1 may be 20°.
  • the display screen of the electronic device is basically a horizontal bar.
  • the height of the display screen of the electronic device is smaller than the width, and the aspect ratio (that is, the ratio of height to width) of the display screen is less than 1.
  • the height of the display is the length of the side with the smaller angle between the display and the vertical plane
  • the width of the display is the length of the side with the smaller angle between the display and the horizontal plane.
  • the height of the display can also be understood as the vertical length of the display
  • the width of the display can also be understood as the horizontal length of the display
  • the aspect ratio of the display can also be understood as the aspect ratio of the display (ie, the vertical length and The ratio of lateral length).
  • the embodiment of the present application also introduces the vertical screen state here.
  • the long side of the display screen of the electronic device is perpendicular to the horizontal plane (for example, as shown in (c) in Figure 11B); or the angle 04 between the long side 01 of the display screen and the horizontal plane 02 is greater than the preset value 1 (for example, as shown in (d) in FIG. 11B, the preset value 1 is greater than or equal to 45°).
  • the height of the display screen of the electronic device is greater than the width, and the aspect ratio of the display screen is greater than 1, and the display screen of the electronic device is basically a vertical bar.
  • the electronic device 100 in response to the user's first operation or second operation, can switch the window mode of the folding screen (including single window mode and dual window mode), and show the first application to the user in different window modes Content.
  • the electronic device 100 in response to the first operation, can switch the window mode to the dual window mode, and display the two interfaces of the first application on the folding screen; in response to the second operation, the electronic device 100 can switch the window mode to single In window mode, an interface of the first application is displayed on the folding screen. That is, in the embodiment of the present application, the electronic device 100 can display the content of the first application in different window modes according to the user's operation in response to the user's operation, which can improve the interaction performance between the electronic device 100 and the user.
  • the methods of the embodiments of the present application may also be applied to non-folding screen electronic devices. That is, the touch screen of the electronic device is a non-folding screen. Specifically, it can be applied to this type of electronic equipment in a landscape state.
  • the electronic device can display the first interface of the first application in a single window in the landscape mode. That is, the electronic device displays the first interface in the first display area and the second display area of the touch screen. At this time, the touch screen does not display the second interface of the first application.
  • the electronic device 100 displays the first interface 1201 of the "hot spot" application in a single window in the landscape state.
  • the electronic device displays the first content of the first interface in the first display area and displays the second interface of the first application in the second display area in the horizontal screen state. That is, the two interfaces of the first application of the electronic device with dual windows.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the first "hot spot" application in a dual window.
  • the first content 1201 and the second interface 1202 of the interface are displayed in the first display area of the folding screen of the electronic device, and the second interface 1202 is displayed in the second display area of the folding screen.
  • the method of the embodiment of the present application may further include: In response to the aforementioned second operation, the electronic device displays the first interface (and does not display the second interface) or the second content of the second interface (and does not display the first interface) in a single window in the horizontal screen state. For example, in response to the user's second operation on the electronic device 100 shown in (b) in FIG. 12, the electronic device 100 may display the first interface 1201 shown in (a) in FIG. 12 in a single window.
  • the first operation may be any operation other than the first preset folding operation in the first operation described in the above embodiment;
  • the second operation may be In the second operation described in the foregoing embodiment, any operation except the second preset folding operation.
  • the electronic device when the electronic device with a non-folding screen is in a landscape state, in response to the user's first operation or second operation, the electronic device can switch the window mode of the folding screen (including single window mode and dual window mode), The content of the first application is presented to the user in different window modes. Specifically, in response to the first operation, the electronic device may switch the window mode to the single window mode, and display an interface of the first application on the folding screen; in response to the second operation, the electronic device may switch the window mode to the dual window mode, The two interfaces of the first application are displayed on the folding screen. That is, in the embodiment of the present application, the electronic device can respond to the user's operation and display the content of the first application in different window modes according to the user's needs, which can improve the interaction performance between the electronic device and the user.
  • a display screen (including a folding screen or a non-folding screen) of the electronic device in the landscape state includes multiple display areas that may be set by the user.
  • a folding screen in an expanded state is taken as an example to describe a method for a user to set multiple display areas.
  • the setting interface 1301 of the electronic device displays the setting controls of the display area, and the user can set the aspect ratio (that is, the aspect ratio) of the first display area and the aspect ratio of the second display area, or The user can select the aspect ratio of the first display area and the aspect ratio of the second display area from the setting interface.
  • the setting interface 1401 of the electronic device 100 displays a display area quantity setting control 1402 and a display area range setting control 1403 in a landscape state.
  • the electronic device 100 may prompt the user to set the range of the first display area, and the user may drag on the display screen to Set the range of the first display area.
  • the electronic device 100 may display a control 1404 for determining the range of the first display area and a control 1405 for canceling the setting.
  • the electronic device 100 can determine the range of the first display area and the second display area set by the user.
  • the setting interface of the electronic device 100 displays a dividing line 1406, and the user can Drag the dividing line 1406 to set the size and aspect ratio of the first display area and the second display area.
  • the user can also set the display area included in the display screen of the electronic device 100 in other ways, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the touch screens are relatively large. Therefore, when the folding screen is in the unfolded state or the non-folding screen is in the landscape state, in order to facilitate operation, the user can hold the electronic device with both hands.
  • the position of the function keys (such as the lock screen key or the volume key, etc.) on the current electronic devices and the quick launch of some applications are mostly for the convenience of the user when the folding screen is in the folded state or the non-folding screen is in the vertical screen state. Designed for manual operation, it is more convenient for users to operate with one hand.
  • some of the above-mentioned applications may include: “camera” application, “flashlight” application, or “voice assistant” application.
  • “camera” application When the folding screen is in the unfolded state or the non-folding screen is in the landscape state, the user cannot conveniently operate the above function keys or start some of the above applications.
  • this embodiment provides an application display method.
  • the method can be applied to electronic devices including touch screens.
  • the touch screen can be a folding screen or a non-folding screen. It should be noted that the folding screen in the embodiment of the present application is in the unfolded state, and the non-folding screen is in the landscape state.
  • the method may include S1501-S1502.
  • the electronic device may display one or more first controls on the touch screen.
  • the one or more first controls may include: one or more third application controls; and/or one or more function key controls.
  • the third application may be a "camera” application, a "flashlight” application, or a “voice assistant” application.
  • the function keys can be lock screen keys, volume keys (including volume + key and volume-key), or home key.
  • the control of the third application is used to trigger the electronic device to start the third application.
  • the control 1601 of the "camera” application shown in FIG. 16 is used to trigger the electronic device to start the camera to capture images.
  • the control 1603 of the "voice assistant” application shown in FIG. 16 is used to trigger the electronic device to start the voice assistant.
  • the control of the function key is used to trigger the electronic device to execute the event corresponding to the function key.
  • the control 1602 of the lock screen key is used to trigger the electronic device to lock the screen
  • the volume + key is used to trigger the electronic device to increase the volume.
  • the third operation may be different from the first and second operations described above.
  • the third operation may include a fifth sliding operation and a sixth sliding operation.
  • the fifth sliding operation may be a bottom-up sliding operation input by the user in the first display area
  • the sixth sliding operation may be a bottom-up sliding operation input by the user in the second display area.
  • the fifth sliding operation may be a bottom-up sliding operation 1503b input by the user in the first display area 1501 shown in FIG. 15(a)
  • the sixth sliding operation may be the user's (a) ) Shown in the second display area 1502 to input the lower right and upward sliding operation 1503a.
  • the fifth sliding operation may be a top-down sliding operation input by the user in the first display area
  • the sixth sliding operation may be a bottom-down sliding operation input by the user in the second display area.
  • the fifth sliding operation may be a bottom-up sliding operation 1504b input by the user in the first display area 1501 shown in FIG. 15(b)
  • the sixth sliding operation may be the user's (b) ) Shown in the second display area 1502 to input the lower right and upward sliding operation 1504a.
  • the third operation may be the same as the first operation or the second operation.
  • the third operation is different from the first and second operations described above.
  • the third operation may be the same as the first and second operations described above.
  • the electronic device displays the third interface.
  • the third interface can be an interface of any application.
  • the third interface may be the interface 1505 shown in (a) of FIG. 15, that is, the product detail page of the "Taobao” application.
  • the third interface may include the aforementioned first interface and second interface.
  • the third interface may include the first interface 1506 (that is, the search result page of the "Taobao” application) and the second interface 1507 (that is, the homepage of the "Taobao” application) shown in (b) of FIG. 15.
  • S1501 may specifically be: the electronic device receives the third operation of the user on the third interface. That is, after the electronic device is unlocked, when any interface is displayed, it can receive the third operation of the user, and in response to the third operation, display one or more first controls.
  • the folding screen can receive the user's third operation, and in response to the third operation, display one or more The first control.
  • the electronic device when the electronic device displays an interface of the "Taobao" application in a single window, the electronic device can receive the third operation of the user.
  • the electronic device when the electronic device displays two interfaces of the "Taobao" application in dual windows, the electronic device can receive the third operation of the user.
  • the electronic device may display multiple first controls shown in FIG. 16.
  • the multiple first controls shown in FIG. 16 include: a control 1601 of a "camera” application, a control 1602 of a “lock screen key” application, and a control 1603 of a "voice assistant” application.
  • the electronic device in response to the user's third operation, may display the above-mentioned one or more first controls on the high-frequency touch area of the touch screen.
  • the high-frequency touch area is a touch area on the touch screen whose frequency or number of operations by the user is higher than the first threshold.
  • the high-frequency touch area may be the high-frequency touch area on the left side of the touch screen or the high-frequency touch area on the right side. For example, take the touch screen of the electronic device as a non-folding screen. As shown in Figure 17, the electronic device is in a landscape state.
  • the electronic device may display multiple first controls 1701 in the high-frequency touch area on the right side of the touch screen.
  • the electronic device can obtain the sliding trajectory of the left-hand gesture (ie the gesture input by the left-hand finger) and the right-hand gesture (ie the gesture input by the right-hand finger) input by the user on the touch screen;
  • the distribution of side track points) in the touch screen the area with more track points on the left side of the touch screen is determined as the high-frequency touch area on the left;
  • the points of the sliding track of the right hand gesture (referred to as the right track point) are
  • the area with more track points on the right side of the touch screen is determined as the high-frequency touch area on the right.
  • the area where the track points are more distributed refers to the area where the density of the track points in the touch screen is higher than a certain threshold.
  • S1502 In response to a user's click operation on a first control (such as a single click operation or a double-click operation, etc.), the electronic device executes an event triggered by the first control.
  • a first control such as a single click operation or a double-click operation, etc.
  • the electronic device may start the camera and display the image preview interface of the "camera” application (not shown in the figure) ).
  • the electronic device may lock the screen and display a lock screen interface (not shown in the drawings).
  • the electronic device in response to the third operation of the user, may display one or more first controls. In this way, the user can control the electronic device through the one or more first controls, which can provide the user with a more convenient and comfortable operating experience.
  • the electronic device may also reduce the content currently displayed on the touch screen (such as the third interface) to a certain ratio and display it in the lower left corner area or from the lower corner area of the touch screen to facilitate the user operating.
  • the touch screens are relatively large.
  • the touch screen is large, the user cannot easily operate part of the touch area of the touch screen.
  • the user cannot conveniently operate the touch area corresponding to the dashed frame 1801 shown in FIG. 18.
  • this embodiment provides an application display method.
  • the method can be applied to electronic devices including touch screens.
  • the touch screen can be a folding screen or a non-folding screen. It should be noted that the folding screen in the embodiment of the present application is in the unfolded state, and the non-folding screen is in the landscape state.
  • the method may include: the electronic device displays a third interface; in response to a user's fourth operation, the electronic device displays one or more second controls; in response to a user's click operation on a second control, the electronic device can execute a corresponding event .
  • the one or more second controls are controls located in the preset touch area of the touch screen in the third interface.
  • the preset touch area is the touch area that is inconvenient for the user to operate on the touch screen.
  • the preset touch area can be pre-configured in the electronic device. Alternatively, the preset touch area can be set by the user.
  • the third interface reference may be made to the relevant content in the above-mentioned example, which is not repeated in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the third interface including the search result page 1805 of the "Taobao” application and the home page 1806 of the "Taobao” application shown in FIG. 18 as an example.
  • the third interface includes three second controls, such as a "scan” control 1802a, a "member code” control 1803a, and a “search box” control 1804a.
  • the electronic device may display a "scan” control 1802b, a "member code” control 1803b, and a “search box” control 1804b.
  • the "scan" control 1802b has the same function as the “scan” control 1802a
  • the "member code” control 1803a has the same function as the “member code” control 1803a
  • the "search box” control 1804b has the same function as the “search box” control. 1804a has the same function.
  • the fourth operation and the above-mentioned third operation may be the same or different.
  • the electronic device in response to the fourth operation, may display not only one or more second controls, but also one or more first controls.
  • the electronic device in response to the user's fourth operation, may display the above-mentioned one or more second controls in the high-frequency touch area of the touch screen.
  • the electronic device in response to the user's fourth operation, may display one or more second controls.
  • the user can use the one or more second controls to operate the interface that the electronic device currently needs to display, which can provide the user with a more convenient and comfortable operating experience.
  • an electronic device which may include: the aforementioned touch screen (such as a folding screen or a non-folding screen), a memory, and one or more processors.
  • the touch screen, memory and processor are coupled.
  • the memory is used to store computer program code, and the computer program code includes computer instructions.
  • the processor executes the computer instructions, the electronic device can execute various functions or steps executed by the mobile phone in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the structure of the electronic device can refer to the structure of the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 6.
  • inventions of the present application further provide a display device, which is characterized in that the device can be applied to an electronic device including the aforementioned touch screen.
  • the device is used to execute various functions or steps performed by the mobile phone in the above method embodiments.
  • the chip system includes at least one processor 1901 and at least one interface circuit 1902.
  • the processor 1901 and the interface circuit 1902 may be interconnected by wires.
  • the interface circuit 1902 may be used to receive signals from other devices (such as the memory of an electronic device).
  • the interface circuit 1902 may be used to send signals to other devices (such as the processor 1901).
  • the interface circuit 1902 can read an instruction stored in the memory, and send the instruction to the processor 1901.
  • the electronic device may execute the steps in the foregoing embodiments.
  • the chip system may also include other discrete devices, which are not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer storage medium, the computer storage medium includes computer instructions, when the computer instructions run on the above-mentioned electronic device, the electronic device is caused to execute each function or step performed by the mobile phone in the above-mentioned method embodiment .
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product, which when the computer program product runs on a computer, causes the computer to execute each function or step performed by the mobile phone in the above method embodiment.
  • the disclosed device and method may be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are merely illustrative.
  • the division of the modules or units is only a logical function division.
  • there may be other division methods for example, multiple units or components may be It can be combined or integrated into another device, or some features can be omitted or not implemented.
  • the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate parts may or may not be physically separate.
  • the parts displayed as units may be one physical unit or multiple physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed to multiple different places. . Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objectives of the solutions of the embodiments.
  • each unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist alone physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the above-mentioned integrated unit can be implemented in the form of hardware or software functional unit.
  • the integrated unit is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a readable storage medium.
  • the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application are essentially or the part that contributes to the prior art, or all or part of the technical solutions can be embodied in the form of software products, which are stored in a storage medium.
  • a device which may be a single-chip microcomputer, a chip, etc.
  • a processor processor
  • the aforementioned storage medium includes: U disk, mobile hard disk, read only memory (read only memory, ROM), random access memory (random access memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program codes.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Hardware Design (AREA)
  • Human Computer Interaction (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Environmental & Geological Engineering (AREA)
  • User Interface Of Digital Computer (AREA)

Abstract

Embodiments of the present application relate to the technical field of electronics, and provided thereby are an application display method and an electronic device, wherein the display content of an electronic device may be switched between one interface of one application and a plurality of interfaces of one application, and thus, the display content of the electronic device may be increased and the utilization rate of the display screen of the electronic device may be improved. The specific solution comprises: an electronic device displaying a first interface of a first application in a first display area and a second display area of a touch screen; the touch screen not displaying a second interface of the first application; in response to a first operation of a user, the electronic device displaying first content of the first interface in the first display area, and displaying the second interface of the first application in the second display area; in response to a second operation of the user, the electronic device displaying the first interface in the first display area and the second display area, not displaying the second interface, or displaying the second content in the first display area and the second display area and not displaying the first interface.

Description

一种应用显示方法及电子设备Application display method and electronic equipment
本申请要求在2019年5月17日提交中国国家知识产权局、申请号为201910413599.4的中国专利申请的优先权,发明名称为“一种应用显示方法及电子设备”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of the Chinese patent application filed with the State Intellectual Property Office of China with the application number 201910413599.4, and the priority of the Chinese patent application with the title of "An Application Display Method and Electronic Device" on May 17, 2019. The entire content is incorporated into this application by reference.
技术领域Technical field
本申请实施例涉及电子技术领域,尤其涉及一种应用显示方法及电子设备。The embodiments of the present application relate to the field of electronic technology, and in particular to an application display method and electronic equipment.
背景技术Background technique
随着电子设备的不断发展,越来越多具有显示屏的电子设备被广泛应用于人们的日常生活和工作中,如具有显示屏的手机等。且不难发现,随着屏幕技术的发展,电子设备的显示屏也变得越来越大,以给用户提供更丰富的信息,带给用户更好的使用体验。With the continuous development of electronic devices, more and more electronic devices with display screens are widely used in people's daily life and work, such as mobile phones with display screens. It is not difficult to find that with the development of screen technology, the display screens of electronic devices have become larger and larger to provide users with richer information and bring users a better experience.
但是,显示屏较大的电子设备(如折叠屏手机)显示应用的界面时,可能会存在电子设备显示内容较为单一,电子设备的显示屏没有被充分利用的问题。However, when an electronic device with a larger display screen (such as a folding screen mobile phone) displays an application interface, there may be a problem that the display content of the electronic device is relatively single, and the display screen of the electronic device is not fully utilized.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请实施例提供一种应用显示方法及电子设备,电子设备的显示内容可以在一个应用的一个界面,以及一个应用的多个界面之间切换,这样可以使电子设备的显示内容更加丰富,可以提升电子设备的显示屏的利用率。The embodiments of the present application provide an application display method and electronic device. The display content of the electronic device can be switched between one interface of an application and multiple interfaces of an application, so that the display content of the electronic device can be richer. Improve the utilization of the display screen of electronic equipment.
为达到上述目的,本申请实施例采用如下技术方案:In order to achieve the foregoing objectives, the following technical solutions are adopted in the embodiments of this application:
第一方面,本申请实施例提供了一种应用显示方法,该方法可以应用于包括触摸屏的电子设备。该方法可以包括:电子设备在触摸屏的第一显示区域和第二显示区域,显示第一应用的第一界面,触摸屏不显示第一应用的第二界面;响应于用户的第一操作,电子设备在第一显示区域显示第一界面的第一内容,在第二显示区域显示第二界面;响应于用户的第二操作,电子设备在第一显示区域和第二显示区域显示第一界面,不显示第二界面,或者,在第一显示区域和第二显示区域显示第二内容,不显示第一界面。In the first aspect, embodiments of the present application provide an application display method, which can be applied to an electronic device including a touch screen. The method may include: the electronic device displays the first interface of the first application in the first display area and the second display area of the touch screen, and the touch screen does not display the second interface of the first application; in response to the first operation of the user, the electronic device The first content of the first interface is displayed in the first display area, and the second interface is displayed in the second display area. In response to the second operation of the user, the electronic device displays the first interface in the first display area and the second display area. The second interface is displayed, or the second content is displayed in the first display area and the second display area, and the first interface is not displayed.
其中,第一内容可以是第一界面的全部内容,也可以是第一界面的部分内容。第二内容可以是第二界面的全部内容,也可以是第二界面的部分内容。Wherein, the first content may be the entire content of the first interface or part of the content of the first interface. The second content can be the entire content of the second interface or part of the content of the second interface.
本申请实施例中,响应于用户的第一操作,电子设备可以将触摸屏的窗口模式由单窗口模式切换为双窗口模式,触摸屏以双窗口显示第一应用的第一界面内容和第二界面的内容,即触摸屏在两个显示区域同时显示第一应用的两个界面的内容。这样,触摸屏便可以向用户呈现第一应用的更多显示内容,可以增大触摸屏在同一时间显示的信息量,提升触摸屏的显示区域的利用率。In the embodiment of the present application, in response to the user's first operation, the electronic device can switch the window mode of the touch screen from the single window mode to the dual window mode, and the touch screen displays the contents of the first interface of the first application and the contents of the second interface in dual windows. Content, that is, the touch screen simultaneously displays the content of the two interfaces of the first application in two display areas. In this way, the touch screen can present more display content of the first application to the user, can increase the amount of information displayed on the touch screen at the same time, and improve the utilization rate of the display area of the touch screen.
结合第一方面,在一种可能的设计方式中,上述触摸屏可以是折叠屏。该折叠屏可折叠形成至少两个屏。该至少两个屏包括第一屏和第二屏。其中,该方法可以应用于折叠屏处于展开状态的情况下。展开状态是第一屏和第二屏的夹角大于预设夹角阈值的状态。With reference to the first aspect, in a possible design manner, the above-mentioned touch screen may be a folding screen. The folding screen can be folded to form at least two screens. The at least two screens include a first screen and a second screen. Among them, this method can be applied when the folding screen is in an unfolded state. The expanded state is a state where the included angle between the first screen and the second screen is greater than a preset included angle threshold.
结合第一方面,在另一种可能的设计方式中,触摸屏是折叠屏的情况下,该方法还可以包括:响应于折叠屏由展开状态转换为折叠状态,电子设备在第一屏显示第一界面,不显示第二界面。其中,折叠状态是第一屏和第二屏的夹角小于或等于预设夹角阈值的状态。With reference to the first aspect, in another possible design manner, when the touch screen is a folding screen, the method may further include: in response to the folding screen being transformed from the unfolded state to the folded state, the electronic device displays the first screen on the first screen. Interface, the second interface is not displayed. Wherein, the folded state is a state where the included angle between the first screen and the second screen is less than or equal to a preset included angle threshold.
可以理解,折叠屏在折叠状态下,第一屏作为主屏显示手机的主界面或者应用界面(如第一界面),第二屏可以黑屏。如此,响应于折叠屏由展开状态转换为折叠状态,第一屏可显 示上述第一界面。It can be understood that when the folding screen is in the folded state, the first screen is used as the main screen to display the main interface or application interface (such as the first interface) of the mobile phone, and the second screen may be black. In this way, in response to the folding screen transitioning from the unfolded state to the folded state, the first screen may display the above-mentioned first interface.
结合第一方面,在另一种可能的设计方式中,上述第一显示区域是第一屏对应的显示区域,第二显示区域是第二屏对应的显示区域。具体的,上述折叠屏沿着折叠边或折叠轴折叠形成第一屏和第二屏。第一显示区域和第二显示区域以折叠边或折叠轴为分界线,折叠屏上折叠边或折叠轴的一侧为所述第一显示区域,另一侧为第二显示区域。也就是说,以折叠屏的折叠边为分界线,当用户面对展开的折叠屏时,折叠屏上折叠边的左侧为第一显示区域,折叠屏上折叠边的右侧为第二显示区域;或者,折叠屏上折叠边的右侧为第一显示区域,折叠屏上折叠边的左侧为第二显示区域。这样,更符合多数用户对折叠屏电子设备的使用习惯。With reference to the first aspect, in another possible design manner, the above-mentioned first display area is a display area corresponding to the first screen, and the second display area is a display area corresponding to the second screen. Specifically, the above-mentioned folding screen is folded along a folding edge or a folding axis to form a first screen and a second screen. The first display area and the second display area are divided by the folding edge or the folding axis, and one side of the folding edge or the folding axis on the folding screen is the first display area, and the other side is the second display area. In other words, taking the folding edge of the folding screen as the dividing line, when the user faces the unfolded folding screen, the left side of the folding edge on the folding screen is the first display area, and the right side of the folding edge on the folding screen is the second display Area; or, the right side of the folding edge on the folding screen is the first display area, and the left side of the folding edge on the folding screen is the second display area. In this way, it is more in line with most users' habits of using folding screen electronic devices.
结合第一方面,在另一种可能的设计方式中,触摸屏是折叠屏的情况下,第一显示区域和第二显示区域预先配置在电子设备中;或者,第一显示区域和第二显示区域由用户在电子设备中设置。也就是说,第一显示区域可以不是第一屏对应的显示区域。With reference to the first aspect, in another possible design manner, when the touch screen is a folding screen, the first display area and the second display area are pre-configured in the electronic device; or, the first display area and the second display area Set by the user in the electronic device. That is, the first display area may not be the display area corresponding to the first screen.
在这种设计方式中,上述响应于折叠屏由展开状态转换为折叠状态,电子设备在第一屏显示第一界面,可以包括:响应于第一屏和第二屏的夹角逐渐变小,电子设备在触摸屏显示第一界面由界面布局适配第一显示区域向界面布局适配第一屏动态变化的图像,直至第一屏和第二屏的夹角等于预设夹角阈值,电子设备在第一屏显示第一界面。其中,第一屏和第二屏的夹角大于预设夹角阈值时,电子设备在第一屏显示第一界面。In this design method, in response to the aforementioned transition of the folding screen from the unfolded state to the folded state, the electronic device displaying the first interface on the first screen may include: responding to the gradually decreasing angle between the first screen and the second screen, The electronic device displays the first interface on the touch screen from the interface layout adapting the first display area to the interface layout adapting to the dynamically changing image of the first screen, until the angle between the first screen and the second screen is equal to the preset angle threshold, the electronic device The first interface is displayed on the first screen. Wherein, when the included angle between the first screen and the second screen is greater than the preset included angle threshold, the electronic device displays the first interface on the first screen.
结合第一方面,在另一种可能的设计方式中,上述触摸屏可以是非折叠屏。上述方法可以应用于电子设备(如电子设备的触摸屏)处于横屏状态。其中,横屏状态是触摸屏的长边与水平面的夹角小于预设值的状态。With reference to the first aspect, in another possible design manner, the above-mentioned touch screen may be a non-folding screen. The above method can be applied to an electronic device (such as a touch screen of an electronic device) in a horizontal screen state. Among them, the horizontal screen state is a state where the angle between the long side of the touch screen and the horizontal plane is less than a preset value.
结合第一方面,在另一种可能的设计方式中,上述在触摸屏可以是非折叠屏的情况下,第一显示区域和第二显示区域预先配置在电子设备中。或者,第一显示区域和第二显示区域由用户在电子设备中设置。With reference to the first aspect, in another possible design manner, in the foregoing case that the touch screen may be a non-folding screen, the first display area and the second display area are pre-configured in the electronic device. Alternatively, the first display area and the second display area are set by the user in the electronic device.
结合第一方面,在另一种可能的设计方式中,上述方法还可以包括:电子设备接收用户对第一显示区域和第二显示区域的分割线的拖动操作;响应于拖动操作,电子设备在触摸屏显示第一显示区域和第二显示区域的大小随着分割线的移动而变化的动态图像。其中,变化后的第一显示区域和第二显示区域的分割线位于拖动操作的停止位置。With reference to the first aspect, in another possible design manner, the above method may further include: the electronic device receives a user's drag operation on the dividing line of the first display area and the second display area; in response to the drag operation, the electronic device The device displays a dynamic image in which the sizes of the first display area and the second display area change with the movement of the dividing line on the touch screen. Wherein, the dividing line between the changed first display area and the second display area is located at the stop position of the drag operation.
结合第一方面,在另一种可能的设计方式中,上述第一显示区域位于分割线的右侧,第二显示区域位于分割线的左侧。其中,当第二操作是用户对分割线的向左拖动操作,且向左拖动的拖动距离大于预设距离时,电子设备在触摸屏显示第一界面;当第二操作是用户对分割线的向右拖动操作,且向右拖动的拖动距离大于预设距离时,电子设备在触摸屏显示第二内容。With reference to the first aspect, in another possible design manner, the above-mentioned first display area is located on the right side of the dividing line, and the second display area is located on the left side of the dividing line. Wherein, when the second operation is a leftward drag operation of the user on the dividing line, and the drag distance of the leftward drag is greater than the preset distance, the electronic device displays the first interface on the touch screen; When the line is dragged to the right, and the drag distance of the right drag is greater than the preset distance, the electronic device displays the second content on the touch screen.
结合第一方面,在另一种可能的设计方式中,响应于第二操作,电子设备可以在触摸屏显示第一界面的界面布局适配第一显示区域动态变化的图像,第二界面的界面布局适配第二显示区域动态变化的图像,直至第二操作对分割线的拖动距离大于预设距离,电子设备在触摸屏显示第一界面或第二内容。In combination with the first aspect, in another possible design manner, in response to the second operation, the electronic device can display the interface layout of the first interface on the touch screen to adapt to the dynamically changing image of the first display area, and the interface layout of the second interface Adapting the dynamically changing image of the second display area until the drag distance of the dividing line by the second operation is greater than the preset distance, and the electronic device displays the first interface or the second content on the touch screen.
结合第一方面,在另一种可能的设计方式中,上述第一操作可以包括:第一滑动操作和第二滑动操作,第二操作包括:第三滑动操作和第四滑动操作。第一滑动操作是在第一显示区域输入的由左向右的滑动操作,第二滑动操作是在第二显示区域输入的由右向左的滑动操作,第三滑动操作是在第一显示区域输入的由右向左的滑动操作,第四滑动操作是在第二显示区域输入的由左向右的滑动操作。或者,第一滑动操作是在第一显示区域输入的由右向左的滑动操作,第二滑动操作是在第二显示区域输入的由左向右的滑动操作,第三滑动操作是 在第一显示区域输入的由左向右的滑动操作,第四滑动操作是在第二显示区域输入的由右向左的滑动操作。With reference to the first aspect, in another possible design manner, the above-mentioned first operation may include: a first sliding operation and a second sliding operation, and the second operation includes: a third sliding operation and a fourth sliding operation. The first sliding operation is a left-to-right sliding operation input in the first display area, the second sliding operation is a right-to-left sliding operation input in the second display area, and the third sliding operation is input in the first display area The input sliding operation from right to left, and the fourth sliding operation is the sliding operation input from left to right in the second display area. Or, the first sliding operation is a right-to-left sliding operation input in the first display area, the second sliding operation is a left-to-right sliding operation input in the second display area, and the third sliding operation is input in the first display area. A sliding operation from left to right entered in the display area, and the fourth sliding operation is a sliding operation from right to left entered in the second display area.
其中,为了区分上述第一操作、第二操作与back操作,本申请实施例中的第一滑动操作、第二滑动操作、第三滑动操作和第四滑动操作可以是从折叠屏的非边缘区域开始的滑动操作。Wherein, in order to distinguish the above-mentioned first operation, second operation and back operation, the first sliding operation, second sliding operation, third sliding operation and fourth sliding operation in the embodiment of the present application may be from the non-edge area of the folding screen Start sliding operation.
结合第一方面,在另一种可能的设计方式中,上述第一滑动操作和第二滑动操作是弧形滑动操作;和/或,第三滑动操作和第四滑动操作是弧形滑动操作。为了区分第一操作、第二操作与back操作,上述弧形滑动操作对应的滑动轨迹的弧度与back操作对应的滑动轨迹不同。With reference to the first aspect, in another possible design manner, the above-mentioned first sliding operation and the second sliding operation are arc-shaped sliding operations; and/or, the third sliding operation and the fourth sliding operation are arc-shaped sliding operations. In order to distinguish the first operation, the second operation and the back operation, the arc of the sliding trajectory corresponding to the arc-shaped sliding operation is different from the sliding trajectory corresponding to the back operation.
结合第一方面,在另一种可能的设计方式中,触摸屏是折叠屏的情况下,第一操作可以是对折叠屏的第一预设折叠操作;第二操作可以是对折叠屏的第二预设折叠操作。其中,第一预设折叠操作与第二预设折叠操作不同。In combination with the first aspect, in another possible design method, when the touch screen is a folding screen, the first operation can be the first preset folding operation on the folding screen; the second operation can be the second folding screen on the folding screen. Preset folding operation. Wherein, the first preset folding operation is different from the second preset folding operation.
结合第一方面,在另一种可能的设计方式中,上述第二界面可以是第一应用的首页。或者,第二界面可以是第一界面的上一层级的界面。或者,第二界面可以是电子设备显示第一界面之前,最近显示的第一应用的界面。或者,第二界面可以是第一应用中预设的一个界面。In combination with the first aspect, in another possible design manner, the above-mentioned second interface may be the homepage of the first application. Alternatively, the second interface may be an interface higher than the first interface. Alternatively, the second interface may be the interface of the first application that was recently displayed before the electronic device displays the first interface. Or, the second interface may be an interface preset in the first application.
第二方面,本申请实施例提供一种电子设备,该电子设备包括触摸屏、存储器和一个或多个处理器;触摸屏、存储器和处理器耦合;存储器用于存储计算机程序代码,计算机程序代码包括计算机指令,当处理器执行计算机指令时,电子设备执行:处理器,用于控制触摸屏在触摸屏的第一显示区域和第二显示区域,显示第一应用的第一界面,控制触摸屏不显示第一应用的第二界面,第一界面包括第一内容;处理器,还用于响应于用户的第一操作,控制触摸屏在第一显示区域显示第一内容,在第二显示区域显示第一应用的第二界面,第二界面包括第二内容;处理器,还用于响应于用户的第二操作,控制触摸屏在第一显示区域和第二显示区域,显示第一界面。In a second aspect, embodiments of the present application provide an electronic device, which includes a touch screen, a memory, and one or more processors; the touch screen, the memory, and the processor are coupled; the memory is used to store computer program codes, and the computer program codes include a computer Instructions, when the processor executes the computer instructions, the electronic device executes: the processor is used to control the touch screen in the first display area and the second display area of the touch screen, display the first interface of the first application, and control the touch screen not to display the first application In the second interface, the first interface includes the first content; the processor is further configured to, in response to the user's first operation, control the touch screen to display the first content in the first display area, and display the first application of the first application in the second display area Second interface, the second interface includes second content; the processor is further configured to control the touch screen to display the first interface in the first display area and the second display area in response to a second operation of the user.
结合第二方面,在一种可能的设计方式中,上述触摸屏是折叠屏,折叠屏可折叠形成至少两个屏,至少两个屏包括第一屏和第二屏。其中,折叠屏处于展开状态;展开状态是第一屏和第二屏的夹角大于预设夹角阈值的状态。With reference to the second aspect, in a possible design manner, the above-mentioned touch screen is a folding screen, and the folding screen can be folded to form at least two screens, and the at least two screens include a first screen and a second screen. The folding screen is in an unfolded state; the unfolded state is a state where the angle between the first screen and the second screen is greater than a preset angle threshold.
结合第二方面,在另一种可能的设计方式中,上述处理器,还用于响应于折叠屏由展开状态转换为折叠状态,控制第一屏显示第一界面。其中,折叠状态是第一屏和第二屏的夹角小于或等于预设夹角阈值的状态。With reference to the second aspect, in another possible design manner, the above-mentioned processor is further configured to control the first screen to display the first interface in response to the conversion of the folding screen from the unfolded state to the folded state. Wherein, the folded state is a state where the included angle between the first screen and the second screen is less than or equal to a preset included angle threshold.
结合第二方面,在另一种可能的设计方式中,上述第一显示区域是第一屏对应的显示区域,第二显示区域是第二屏对应的显示区域。With reference to the second aspect, in another possible design manner, the above-mentioned first display area is a display area corresponding to the first screen, and the second display area is a display area corresponding to the second screen.
结合第二方面,在另一种可能的设计方式中,上述第一显示区域不是第一屏对应的显示区域。处理器,用于响应于折叠屏由展开状态转换为折叠状态,控制第一屏显示第一界面,包括:响应于第一屏和第二屏的夹角逐渐变小,控制触摸屏显示第一界面由界面布局适配第一显示区域向界面布局适配第一屏动态变化的图像,直至第一屏和第二屏的夹角等于预设夹角阈值,控制第一屏显示第一界面。其中,第一屏和第二屏的夹角大于预设夹角阈值时,第一屏显示第一界面。With reference to the second aspect, in another possible design manner, the above-mentioned first display area is not a display area corresponding to the first screen. The processor is configured to control the first screen to display the first interface in response to the folding screen changing from the unfolded state to the folded state, including: in response to the angle between the first screen and the second screen being gradually reduced, controlling the touch screen to display the first interface From the interface layout adapting the first display area to the interface layout adapting the dynamically changing image of the first screen, until the angle between the first screen and the second screen is equal to the preset angle threshold, the first screen is controlled to display the first interface. Wherein, when the included angle between the first screen and the second screen is greater than the preset included angle threshold, the first screen displays the first interface.
结合第二方面,在另一种可能的设计方式中,上述电子设备处于横屏状态;其中,横屏状态是触摸屏的长边与水平面的夹角小于预设值的状态。With reference to the second aspect, in another possible design manner, the above electronic device is in a horizontal screen state; wherein, the horizontal screen state is a state where the angle between the long side of the touch screen and the horizontal plane is less than a preset value.
结合第二方面,在另一种可能的设计方式中,上述第一显示区域和第二显示区域预先配置在电子设备中;或者,第一显示区域和第二显示区域由用户在电子设备中设置。With reference to the second aspect, in another possible design manner, the above-mentioned first display area and second display area are pre-configured in the electronic device; or, the first display area and the second display area are set by the user in the electronic device .
结合第二方面,在另一种可能的设计方式中,上述处理器,还用于接收用户对第一显示 区域和第二显示区域的分割线的拖动操作;响应于拖动操作,控制触摸屏显示第一显示区域和第二显示区域的大小随着分割线的移动而变化的动态图像。其中,变化后的第一显示区域和第二显示区域的分割线位于拖动操作的停止位置。With reference to the second aspect, in another possible design manner, the above-mentioned processor is further configured to receive a user's drag operation on the dividing line of the first display area and the second display area; in response to the drag operation, control the touch screen Displays a moving image in which the sizes of the first display area and the second display area change with the movement of the dividing line. Wherein, the dividing line between the changed first display area and the second display area is located at the stop position of the drag operation.
结合第二方面,在另一种可能的设计方式中,上述第一显示区域位于分割线的右侧,第二显示区域位于分割线的左侧。其中,当第二操作是用户对分割线的向左拖动操作,且向左拖动的拖动距离大于预设距离时,处理器控制触摸屏显示第一界面;当第二操作是用户对分割线的向右拖动操作,且向右拖动的拖动距离大于预设距离时,处理器控制触摸屏显示第二内容。With reference to the second aspect, in another possible design manner, the above-mentioned first display area is located on the right side of the dividing line, and the second display area is located on the left side of the dividing line. Wherein, when the second operation is a leftward drag operation of the user on the dividing line, and the drag distance of the leftward drag is greater than the preset distance, the processor controls the touch screen to display the first interface; when the second operation is the user on the dividing line When the line is dragged to the right, and the drag distance of the right drag is greater than the preset distance, the processor controls the touch screen to display the second content.
结合第二方面,在另一种可能的设计方式中,上述处理器,用于响应于用户的第二操作,控制触摸屏显示第一界面或第二内容,包括:处理器,用于响应于第二操作,控制触摸屏显示第一界面的界面布局适配第一显示区域动态变化的图像,第二界面的界面布局适配第二显示区域动态变化的图像,直至第二操作对分割线的拖动距离大于预设距离,控制触摸屏显示第一界面或第二内容。With reference to the second aspect, in another possible design manner, the above-mentioned processor is configured to control the touch screen to display the first interface or the second content in response to a second operation of the user, and includes: a processor, configured to respond to the first The second operation is to control the touch screen to display the interface layout of the first interface to adapt to the dynamically changing image of the first display area, and the interface layout of the second interface to adapt to the dynamically changing image of the second display area, until the second operation drags the dividing line The distance is greater than the preset distance, and the touch screen is controlled to display the first interface or the second content.
需要注意的是,本申请第二方面及其任一种可能的设计方式中所述的第一操作、第二操作和第二界面,可以参考第一方面及其任一种可能的设计方式中相关介绍,本申请实施例这里不予赘述。It should be noted that the first operation, second operation, and second interface described in the second aspect of this application and any of its possible design methods may refer to the first aspect and any of its possible design methods. For related introductions, the embodiments of this application will not be repeated here.
第三方面,本申请实施例提供一种显示装置,该装置可以应用于包括上述触摸屏的电子设备,该装置用于执行如第一方面或第二方面及其任一种可能的设计方式所述的方法。In a third aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a display device, which can be applied to an electronic device including the above-mentioned touch screen, and the device is used to perform the operations described in the first aspect or the second aspect and any one of the possible design methods thereof. Methods.
第四方面,本申请实施例提供一种芯片***,该芯片***应用于包括上述触摸屏的电子设备。该芯片***包括一个或多个接口电路和一个或多个处理器。该接口电路和处理器通过线路互联。该接口电路用于从电子设备的存储器接收信号,并向处理器发送该信号,该信号包括存储器中存储的计算机指令。当处理器执行所述计算机指令时,电子设备执行如第一方面或第二方面及其任一种可能的设计方式所述的方法。In a fourth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a chip system, which is applied to an electronic device including the aforementioned touch screen. The chip system includes one or more interface circuits and one or more processors. The interface circuit and the processor are interconnected by wires. The interface circuit is used to receive a signal from the memory of the electronic device and send the signal to the processor, and the signal includes a computer instruction stored in the memory. When the processor executes the computer instruction, the electronic device executes the method described in the first aspect or the second aspect and any one of the possible design manners thereof.
第五方面,本申请实施例提供一种计算机存储介质,该计算机存储介质包括计算机指令,当所述计算机指令在电子设备上运行时,使得所述电子设备执行如第一方面或第二方面及其任一种可能的设计方式所述的方法。In a fifth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a computer storage medium, the computer storage medium includes computer instructions, when the computer instructions run on an electronic device, the electronic device is caused to execute the first aspect or the second aspect and The method described in any of its possible design methods.
第六方面,本申请实施例提供一种计算机程序产品,当所述计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行如第一方面或第二方面及其任一种可能的设计方式所述的方法。In the sixth aspect, the embodiments of the present application provide a computer program product. When the computer program product runs on a computer, the computer can execute as described in the first aspect or the second aspect and any of its possible design methods. The method described.
可以理解地,上述提供的第二方面及其任一种可能的设计方式所述的电子设备,第三方面所述的装置,第四方面所述的芯片***,第五方面所述的计算机存储介质,第六方面所述的计算机程序产品所能达到的有益效果,可参考如第一方面及其任一种可能的设计方式中的有益效果,此处不再赘述。Understandably, the electronic equipment described in the second aspect and any of its possible design methods provided above, the device described in the third aspect, the chip system described in the fourth aspect, and the computer storage device described in the fifth aspect are For the medium, the beneficial effects that can be achieved by the computer program product described in the sixth aspect may refer to the beneficial effects in the first aspect and any of its possible design methods, which will not be repeated here.
附图说明Description of the drawings
图1为本申请实施例提供的一种折叠屏的形态示意图;FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a folding screen provided by an embodiment of the application;
图2为本申请实施例提供的另一种折叠屏的形态示意图;2 is a schematic diagram of another folding screen provided by an embodiment of the application;
图3为本申请实施例提供的另一种折叠屏的形态示意图;3 is a schematic diagram of another folding screen provided by an embodiment of the application;
图4为本申请实施例提供的一种折叠屏的显示界面的实例示意图;4 is a schematic diagram of an example of a display interface of a folding screen provided by an embodiment of the application;
图5为本申请实施例提供的另一种折叠屏的显示界面的实例示意图;5 is a schematic diagram of an example of a display interface of another folding screen provided by an embodiment of the application;
图6为本申请实施例提供的一种电子设备的硬件结构示意图;6 is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of an electronic device provided by an embodiment of the application;
图7A为本申请实施例提供的一种应用显示方法流程图;FIG. 7A is a flowchart of an application display method provided by an embodiment of this application;
图7B为本申请实施例提供的一种显示区域的实例示意图;FIG. 7B is a schematic diagram of an example of a display area provided by an embodiment of the application;
图7C为本申请实施例提供的另一种折叠屏的显示界面的实例示意图;FIG. 7C is a schematic diagram of an example of a display interface of another folding screen provided by an embodiment of the application;
图7D为本申请实施例提供的另一种折叠屏的显示界面的实例示意图;FIG. 7D is a schematic diagram of an example of a display interface of another folding screen provided by an embodiment of the application; FIG.
图8A为本申请实施例提供的另一种折叠屏的显示界面的实例示意图;8A is a schematic diagram of an example of a display interface of another folding screen provided by an embodiment of the application;
图8B为现有技术中的一种电子设备的显示界面的实例示意图;8B is a schematic diagram of an example of a display interface of an electronic device in the prior art;
图8C为本申请实施例提供的一种活动记录栈的实例示意图;8C is a schematic diagram of an example of an activity record stack provided by an embodiment of the application;
图8D为本申请实施例提供的另一种折叠屏的显示界面的实例示意图;8D is a schematic diagram of an example of a display interface of another folding screen provided by an embodiment of the application;
图9为本申请实施例提供的另一种折叠屏的显示界面的实例示意图;9 is a schematic diagram of an example of a display interface of another folding screen provided by an embodiment of the application;
图10为本申请实施例提供的另一种折叠屏的显示界面的实例示意图;FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of an example of a display interface of another folding screen provided by an embodiment of the application;
图11A为本申请实施例提供的另一种折叠屏的显示界面的实例示意图;11A is a schematic diagram of an example of a display interface of another folding screen provided by an embodiment of the application;
图11B为本申请实施例提供的一种电子设备的横屏状态和竖屏状态的实例示意图;FIG. 11B is a schematic diagram of an example of a horizontal screen state and a vertical screen state of an electronic device according to an embodiment of the application;
图12为本申请实施例提供的另一种折叠屏的显示界面的实例示意图;FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of an example of a display interface of another folding screen provided by an embodiment of the application;
图13为本申请实施例提供的一种显示区域的设置界面实例示意图;FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of an example of a display area setting interface provided by an embodiment of the application;
图14为本申请实施例提供的另一种显示区域的设置界面实例示意图;14 is a schematic diagram of another example of a setting interface of a display area provided by an embodiment of the application;
图15为本申请实施例提供的另一种显示区域的设置界面实例示意图;15 is a schematic diagram of another example of a setting interface of a display area provided by an embodiment of the application;
图16为本申请实施例提供的另一种显示区域的设置界面实例示意图;16 is a schematic diagram of another example of a setting interface of a display area provided by an embodiment of the application;
图17为本申请实施例提供的另一种显示区域的设置界面实例示意图;FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram of another example of a setting interface of a display area provided by an embodiment of the application;
图18为本申请实施例提供的另一种显示区域的设置界面实例示意图;18 is a schematic diagram of another example of a setting interface of a display area provided by an embodiment of the application;
图19为本申请实施例提供的一种芯片***的示意图。FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram of a chip system provided by an embodiment of the application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
以下,术语“第一”、“第二”仅用于描述目的,而不能理解为指示或暗示相对重要性或者隐含指明所指示的技术特征的数量。由此,限定有“第一”、“第二”的特征可以明示或者隐含地包括一个或者更多个该特征。在本实施例的描述中,除非另有说明,“多个”的含义是两个或两个以上。Hereinafter, the terms "first" and "second" are only used for descriptive purposes, and cannot be understood as indicating or implying relative importance or implicitly indicating the number of indicated technical features. Thus, the features defined with "first" and "second" may explicitly or implicitly include one or more of these features. In the description of this embodiment, unless otherwise specified, "plurality" means two or more.
本申请实施例提供一种应用显示方法,该方法可以应用于大屏电子设备,即包括较大的触摸屏的电子设备。例如,该触摸屏可以为折叠屏。The embodiment of the present application provides an application display method, which can be applied to a large-screen electronic device, that is, an electronic device including a larger touch screen. For example, the touch screen may be a folding screen.
上述折叠屏可折叠形成至少两个屏。例如,折叠屏可沿折叠边折叠形成第一屏和第二屏。需要说明的是,该折叠屏被折叠后形成的至少两个屏,可以为独立存在的多个屏,也可以为一体结构的一个完整屏,只是被折叠形成了至少两部分。The above-mentioned folding screen can be folded to form at least two screens. For example, the folding screen can be folded along the folding edge to form the first screen and the second screen. It should be noted that the at least two screens formed after the folding screen is folded may be multiple independent screens or a complete screen in an integrated structure, but at least two parts are formed by folding.
在一些实施例中,上述折叠屏可以是柔性折叠屏。柔性折叠屏包括采用柔性材质制作的折叠边。该柔性折叠屏的部分或全部采用柔性材质制作。例如:该柔性折叠屏中只有可折叠的部分(如折叠边)采用柔性材质制作,其它部分采用刚性材质制作;或者,该柔性折叠屏全部采用柔性材质制作。该折叠屏可沿折叠边折叠形成多个(两个或两个以上)屏。In some embodiments, the aforementioned folding screen may be a flexible folding screen. The flexible folding screen includes folding edges made of flexible materials. Part or all of the flexible folding screen is made of flexible materials. For example, only the foldable part of the flexible folding screen (such as folding edges) is made of flexible materials, and the other parts are made of rigid materials; or, the flexible folding screen is all made of flexible materials. The folding screen can be folded along the folding edge to form multiple (two or more) screens.
例如,图1中的(a)所示的折叠屏是柔性折叠屏。图1中的(a)所示的折叠屏是一个完整的显示屏,该显示屏包括采用柔性材质制作的折叠边。该折叠屏沿折叠边折叠后,可形成图1中的(b)所示的A屏101和B屏102(即第一屏和第二屏)。其中,柔性折叠屏也可以折叠形成三个或三个以上的屏,其具体形态及折叠方式可参考图1及相关描述,此处不再赘述。For example, the folding screen shown in (a) in FIG. 1 is a flexible folding screen. The folding screen shown in (a) in Figure 1 is a complete display screen, which includes folding edges made of flexible materials. After the folding screen is folded along the folding edge, the A screen 101 and the B screen 102 (that is, the first screen and the second screen) shown in (b) of FIG. 1 can be formed. Among them, the flexible folding screen can also be folded to form three or more than three screens. For the specific shape and folding method, refer to FIG. 1 and related descriptions, which will not be repeated here.
在另一些实施例中,折叠屏可以为多屏折叠屏。该多屏折叠屏可包括多个(两个或两个以上)屏。需要注意的是,这多个屏是多个单独的显示屏。这多个屏可依次通过折叠轴连接。每个屏可以绕与其连接的折叠轴转动,实现多屏折叠屏的折叠。In other embodiments, the folding screen may be a multi-screen folding screen. The multi-screen folding screen may include multiple (two or more) screens. It should be noted that these multiple screens are multiple separate display screens. These multiple screens can be connected by folding shafts in sequence. Each screen can be rotated around a folding axis connected to it to realize the folding of multi-screen folding screens.
例如,图2中的(a)所示的折叠屏是多屏折叠屏。该多屏折叠屏包括两个单独的屏,分 别称为A屏201和B屏202(即第一屏和第二屏)。如图2中的(b)所示,A屏201和B屏202通过折叠轴连接,且A屏201和B屏202可绕着折叠轴转动,实现多屏折叠屏的折叠。其中,多屏折叠屏也可以包括三个或三个以上的屏,其具体形态及折叠方式可参考图2及相关描述,此处不再赘述。For example, the folding screen shown in (a) in FIG. 2 is a multi-screen folding screen. The multi-screen folding screen includes two separate screens, called A screen 201 and B screen 202 (i.e., the first screen and the second screen). As shown in (b) of FIG. 2, the A screen 201 and the B screen 202 are connected by a folding shaft, and the A screen 201 and the B screen 202 can rotate around the folding shaft to realize the folding of the multi-screen folding screen. Among them, the multi-screen folding screen may also include three or more than three screens. For the specific form and folding method, refer to FIG. 2 and related descriptions, which will not be repeated here.
上述图1-图2中是将电子设备的折叠屏纵向折叠,实现折叠屏的折叠的。当然,也可以将电子设备的折叠屏横向折叠,以实现折叠屏的折叠。例如,图3中的(a)所示的折叠屏沿折叠边折叠后,在折叠的过程中,可依次形成图3中的(b)所示的A屏和B屏,以及图3中的(c)所示的A屏和B屏。In Figures 1 to 2 above, the folding screen of the electronic device is folded longitudinally to realize the folding of the folding screen. Of course, the folding screen of the electronic device can also be folded horizontally to realize the folding of the folding screen. For example, after the folding screen shown in Figure 3 (a) is folded along the folding edge, during the folding process, the A screen and the B screen shown in Figure 3 (b) can be formed in sequence, and the screen in Figure 3 (c) A screen and B screen shown.
本申请实施例的方法可以应用于折叠屏处于展开状态的情况下。需要注意的是,本申请实施例中,折叠屏处于展开状态(或者称为:折叠屏被展开)具体可以为:上述第一屏和第二屏的夹角为180°;或者,上述第一屏和第二屏的夹角与180°的差值的绝对值小于预设角度阈值。例如,预设角度阈值可以为5°,10°或者15°等。例如,如图1中的(a)、图2中的(a)或者图3中的(a)所示,A屏和B屏之间的夹角α为180°。图1中的(a)、图2中的(a)和图3中的(a)均为折叠屏处于展开状态的形态示意图。The method of the embodiment of the present application can be applied to the case where the folding screen is in an unfolded state. It should be noted that, in the embodiment of the present application, the folding screen is in the unfolded state (or referred to as: the folding screen is unfolded) specifically may be: the angle between the first screen and the second screen is 180°; or, the first The absolute value of the difference between the angle between the screen and the second screen and 180° is less than the preset angle threshold. For example, the preset angle threshold may be 5°, 10°, or 15°. For example, as shown in (a) in FIG. 1, (a) in FIG. 2, or (a) in FIG. 3, the angle α between the A screen and the B screen is 180°. (A) in FIG. 1, (a) in FIG. 2, and (a) in FIG. 3 are schematic diagrams of the folding screen in an unfolded state.
可以理解,对于具有上述折叠屏的电子设备而言,当折叠屏处于折叠状态时,可以在第一屏显示界面;当折叠屏处于展开状态时,可以在第一屏和第二屏显示界面。也就是说,当折叠屏处于折叠状态时,第一屏可以作为主屏显示界面,而第二屏则可以黑屏。It can be understood that for the electronic device with the above-mentioned folding screen, when the folding screen is in the folded state, the interface can be displayed on the first screen; when the folding screen is in the expanded state, the interface can be displayed on the first screen and the second screen. In other words, when the folding screen is in the folded state, the first screen can be used as the main screen display interface, and the second screen can be black.
需要注意的是,折叠屏折叠形成的至少两个屏的尺寸可以相同,也可以不同。例如,以折叠屏折叠形成两个屏为例,图1、图2或图3中的(b)所示的A屏和B屏的尺寸可以相同,也可以不同。It should be noted that the dimensions of at least two screens formed by folding the folding screen can be the same or different. For example, taking the folding screen to form two screens as an example, the sizes of the A screen and the B screen shown in (b) in FIG. 1, FIG. 2 or FIG. 3 may be the same or different.
其中,折叠屏被展开后,该折叠屏的第一屏和第二屏可以显示电子设备的主界面或者各个应用界面。电子设备折叠屏被展开后,该折叠屏用于显示界面的显示区域的面积较大。此时,则可能会因为电子设备使用较大的显示区域显示较少的显示内容,而使得折叠屏显示的内容较为单一,折叠屏的显示区域没有被充分利用的问题。Wherein, after the folding screen is unfolded, the first screen and the second screen of the folding screen can display the main interface of the electronic device or various application interfaces. After the folding screen of the electronic device is unfolded, the area of the display area of the folding screen for displaying the interface is relatively large. At this time, because the electronic device uses a larger display area to display less display content, the content displayed on the folding screen is relatively single, and the display area of the folding screen is not fully utilized.
以电子设备100显示“头条”应用的界面为例。例如,如图4中的(a)所示,电子设备100的折叠屏被展开后,可以不改变应用的界面布局,在折叠边一侧(如左侧)的显示屏显示“头条”应用的推荐界面。又例如,如图4中的(b)所示,电子设备100的折叠屏被展开后,可以不改变应用的界面布局,在折叠屏居中显示“头条”应用的推荐界面。但是,电子设备100采用图4中的(a)或者图4中的(b)所示的显示方式显示“头条”应用的界面时,折叠屏的一部分显示区没有显示具体内容,折叠屏的显示区域没有被充分利用。Take the electronic device 100 displaying the interface of the "Toutiao" application as an example. For example, as shown in Figure 4(a), after the folding screen of the electronic device 100 is unfolded, the interface layout of the application may not be changed, and the display screen on the side of the folding side (such as the left side) displays the "headline" application Recommended interface. For another example, as shown in FIG. 4(b), after the folding screen of the electronic device 100 is unfolded, the interface layout of the application may not be changed, and the recommended interface of the "Toutiao" application may be displayed in the center of the folding screen. However, when the electronic device 100 uses the display mode shown in Figure 4 (a) or Figure 4 (b) to display the interface of the "Toutiao" application, a part of the display area of the folding screen does not display specific content, and the display of the folding screen The area is not fully utilized.
又例如,电子设备100的折叠屏被展开后,电子设备100可以调整应用的界面布局,使得应用的界面布局适配被展开的折叠屏。电子设备100可以显示图5所示的“头条”应用的界面。图5所示的显示方式中,即使“头条”应用的推荐界面中的元素可以分布在折叠屏的每个区域,折叠屏中没有大面积的空白;但是,因为折叠屏展开后显示区域的面积较大(相当于两个屏的面积),因此“头条”应用的推荐界面中的元素在展开的折叠屏显示时,这些元素在折叠屏上的分布则较为稀疏,折叠屏的显示区域不能被充分利用。For another example, after the folding screen of the electronic device 100 is unfolded, the electronic device 100 may adjust the interface layout of the application so that the interface layout of the application adapts to the unfolded folding screen. The electronic device 100 may display the interface of the “Toutiao” application shown in FIG. 5. In the display mode shown in Figure 5, even though the elements in the recommended interface of the "Toutiao" application can be distributed in each area of the folding screen, there is no large area of blank space in the folding screen; however, because of the area of the display area after the folding screen is expanded Larger (equivalent to the area of two screens), so when the elements in the recommended interface of the "Toutiao" application are displayed on the expanded folding screen, the distribution of these elements on the folding screen is relatively sparse, and the display area of the folding screen cannot be Take advantage of.
为了解决折叠屏的显示区域不能被充分利用的问题,本申请实施例提供一种应用显示方法。该方法可以应用于电子设备的折叠屏被展开的情况下。该方法中,响应于用户的操作(如第一操作),电子设备的折叠屏可以划分为多个区域,电子设备可以在该多个区域显示同一应用的不同界面。其中,该多个区域用于电子设备进行显示,因而该多个区域也可以称为显示区域。其中,不同显示区域之间没有重叠。可以理解,电子设备的折叠屏在不同区域显示同 一应用的不同界面,可以增大折叠屏在同一时间向用户展示的信息量,提升折叠屏的显示区域的利用率。In order to solve the problem that the display area of the folding screen cannot be fully utilized, an embodiment of the present application provides an application display method. This method can be applied when the folding screen of the electronic device is unfolded. In this method, in response to a user's operation (such as the first operation), the folding screen of the electronic device can be divided into multiple areas, and the electronic device can display different interfaces of the same application in the multiple areas. Wherein, the multiple areas are used for display by the electronic device, so the multiple areas may also be referred to as display areas. Among them, there is no overlap between different display areas. It can be understood that the folding screen of an electronic device displays different interfaces of the same application in different areas, which can increase the amount of information displayed to the user at the same time by the folding screen and improve the utilization of the display area of the folding screen.
示例性的,本申请实施例中的电子设备可以是手机、平板电脑、桌面型、膝上型、手持计算机、笔记本电脑、超级移动个人计算机(ultra-mobile personal computer,UMPC)、上网本,以及蜂窝电话、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant,PDA)、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)\虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)设备等包括折叠屏的设备,本申请实施例对该设备的具体形态不作特殊限制。Exemplarily, the electronic devices in the embodiments of the present application may be mobile phones, tablet computers, desktops, laptops, handheld computers, notebook computers, ultra-mobile personal computers (UMPC), netbooks, and cellular computers. Telephones, personal digital assistants (PDAs), augmented reality (AR)\virtual reality (VR) devices and other devices including folding screens, the specific form of the device is not special in the embodiments of this application limit.
下面将结合附图对本申请实施例的实施方式进行详细描述。The implementation of the embodiments of the present application will be described in detail below in conjunction with the accompanying drawings.
请参考图6,为本申请实施例提供的一种电子设备100的结构示意图。如图6所示,电子设备100可以包括处理器610,外部存储器接口620,内部存储器621,通用串行总线(universal serial bus,USB)接口630,充电管理模块640,电源管理模块641,电池642,天线1,天线2,移动通信模块650,无线通信模块660,音频模块670,扬声器670A,受话器670B,麦克风670C,耳机接口670D,传感器模块680,按键690,马达691,指示器692,摄像头693,显示屏694,以及用户标识模块(subscriber identification module,SIM)卡接口695等。其中,传感器模块680可以包括压力传感器680A,陀螺仪传感器680B,气压传感器680C,磁传感器680D,加速度传感器680E,距离传感器680F,接近光传感器680G,指纹传感器680H,温度传感器680J,触摸传感器680K,环境光传感器680L,骨传导传感器680M等。Please refer to FIG. 6, which is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device 100 provided by an embodiment of this application. As shown in FIG. 6, the electronic device 100 may include a processor 610, an external memory interface 620, an internal memory 621, a universal serial bus (USB) interface 630, a charging management module 640, a power management module 641, and a battery 642 , Antenna 1, antenna 2, mobile communication module 650, wireless communication module 660, audio module 670, speaker 670A, receiver 670B, microphone 670C, earphone interface 670D, sensor module 680, buttons 690, motor 691, indicator 692, camera 693 , The display screen 694, and the subscriber identification module (SIM) card interface 695, etc. Among them, the sensor module 680 may include a pressure sensor 680A, a gyroscope sensor 680B, an air pressure sensor 680C, a magnetic sensor 680D, an acceleration sensor 680E, a distance sensor 680F, a proximity light sensor 680G, a fingerprint sensor 680H, a temperature sensor 680J, a touch sensor 680K, and environment Light sensor 680L, bone conduction sensor 680M, etc.
可以理解的是,本实施例示意的结构并不构成对电子设备100的具体限定。在另一些实施例中,电子设备100可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件,或者组合某些部件,或者拆分某些部件,或者不同的部件布置。图示的部件可以以硬件,软件或软件和硬件的组合实现。It can be understood that the structure illustrated in this embodiment does not constitute a specific limitation on the electronic device 100. In other embodiments, the electronic device 100 may include more or fewer components than shown, or combine certain components, or split certain components, or arrange different components. The illustrated components can be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of software and hardware.
处理器610可以包括一个或多个处理单元,例如:处理器610可以包括应用处理器(application processor,AP),调制解调处理器,图形处理器(graphics processing unit,GPU),图像信号处理器(image signal processor,ISP),控制器,存储器,视频编解码器,数字信号处理器(digital signal processor,DSP),基带处理器,和/或神经网络处理器(neural-network processing unit,NPU)等。其中,不同的处理单元可以是独立的器件,也可以集成在一个或多个处理器中。The processor 610 may include one or more processing units. For example, the processor 610 may include an application processor (AP), a modem processor, a graphics processing unit (GPU), and an image signal processor. (image signal processor, ISP), controller, memory, video codec, digital signal processor (digital signal processor, DSP), baseband processor, and/or neural-network processing unit (NPU) Wait. Among them, the different processing units may be independent devices or integrated in one or more processors.
控制器可以是电子设备100的神经中枢和指挥中心。控制器可以根据指令操作码和时序信号,产生操作控制信号,完成取指令和执行指令的控制。The controller may be the nerve center and command center of the electronic device 100. The controller can generate operation control signals according to the instruction operation code and timing signals to complete the control of fetching and executing instructions.
处理器610中还可以设置存储器,用于存储指令和数据。在一些实施例中,处理器610中的存储器为高速缓冲存储器。该存储器可以保存处理器610刚用过或循环使用的指令或数据。如果处理器610需要再次使用该指令或数据,可从所述存储器中直接调用。避免了重复存取,减少了处理器610的等待时间,因而提高了***的效率。A memory may also be provided in the processor 610 to store instructions and data. In some embodiments, the memory in the processor 610 is a cache memory. The memory can store instructions or data that have just been used or recycled by the processor 610. If the processor 610 needs to use the instruction or data again, it can be directly called from the memory. Repeated accesses are avoided, the waiting time of the processor 610 is reduced, and the efficiency of the system is improved.
在一些实施例中,处理器610可以包括一个或多个接口。接口可以包括集成电路(inter-integrated circuit,I2C)接口,集成电路内置音频(inter-integrated circuit sound,I2S)接口,脉冲编码调制(pulse code modulation,PCM)接口,通用异步收发传输器(universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter,UART)接口,移动产业处理器接口(mobile industry processor interface,MIPI),通用输入输出(general-purpose input/output,GPIO)接口,用户标识模块(subscriber identity module,SIM)接口,和/或通用串行总线(universal serial bus,USB)接口等。In some embodiments, the processor 610 may include one or more interfaces. The interface may include an integrated circuit (inter-integrated circuit, I2C) interface, an integrated circuit built-in audio (inter-integrated circuit sound, I2S) interface, a pulse code modulation (PCM) interface, and a universal asynchronous transmitter receiver/transmitter, UART) interface, mobile industry processor interface (MIPI), general-purpose input/output (GPIO) interface, subscriber identity module (SIM) interface, and / Or Universal Serial Bus (USB) interface, etc.
可以理解的是,本实施例示意的各模块间的接口连接关系,只是示意性说明,并不构成 对电子设备100的结构限定。在另一些实施例中,电子设备100也可以采用上述实施例中不同的接口连接方式,或多种接口连接方式的组合。It can be understood that the interface connection relationship between the modules illustrated in this embodiment is merely a schematic description, and does not constitute a structural limitation of the electronic device 100. In other embodiments, the electronic device 100 may also adopt different interface connection modes in the foregoing embodiments, or a combination of multiple interface connection modes.
充电管理模块640用于从充电器接收充电输入。其中,充电器可以是无线充电器,也可以是有线充电器。在一些有线充电的实施例中,充电管理模块640可以通过USB接口630接收有线充电器的充电输入。在一些无线充电的实施例中,充电管理模块640可以通过电子设备100的无线充电线圈接收无线充电输入。充电管理模块640为电池642充电的同时,还可以通过电源管理模块641为电子设备供电。The charging management module 640 is used to receive charging input from the charger. Among them, the charger can be a wireless charger or a wired charger. In some wired charging embodiments, the charging management module 640 may receive the charging input of the wired charger through the USB interface 630. In some embodiments of wireless charging, the charging management module 640 may receive the wireless charging input through the wireless charging coil of the electronic device 100. While the charging management module 640 charges the battery 642, it can also supply power to the electronic device through the power management module 641.
电源管理模块641用于连接电池642,充电管理模块640与处理器610。电源管理模块641接收电池642和/或充电管理模块640的输入,为处理器610,内部存储器621,外部存储器,显示屏694,摄像头693,和无线通信模块660等供电。电源管理模块641还可以用于监测电池容量,电池循环次数,电池健康状态(漏电,阻抗)等参数。在其他一些实施例中,电源管理模块641也可以设置于处理器610中。在另一些实施例中,电源管理模块641和充电管理模块640也可以设置于同一个器件中。The power management module 641 is used to connect the battery 642, the charging management module 640 and the processor 610. The power management module 641 receives input from the battery 642 and/or the charge management module 640, and supplies power to the processor 610, internal memory 621, external memory, display screen 694, camera 693, and wireless communication module 660. The power management module 641 can also be used to monitor parameters such as battery capacity, battery cycle times, and battery health status (leakage, impedance). In some other embodiments, the power management module 641 may also be provided in the processor 610. In other embodiments, the power management module 641 and the charging management module 640 may also be provided in the same device.
电子设备100的无线通信功能可以通过天线1,天线2,移动通信模块650,无线通信模块660,调制解调处理器以及基带处理器等实现。The wireless communication function of the electronic device 100 can be realized by the antenna 1, the antenna 2, the mobile communication module 650, the wireless communication module 660, the modem processor, and the baseband processor.
天线1和天线2用于发射和接收电磁波信号。电子设备100中的每个天线可用于覆盖单个或多个通信频带。不同的天线还可以复用,以提高天线的利用率。例如:可以将天线1复用为无线局域网的分集天线。在另外一些实施例中,天线可以和调谐开关结合使用。The antenna 1 and the antenna 2 are used to transmit and receive electromagnetic wave signals. Each antenna in the electronic device 100 can be used to cover a single or multiple communication frequency bands. Different antennas can also be reused to improve antenna utilization. For example, antenna 1 can be multiplexed as a diversity antenna of a wireless local area network. In other embodiments, the antenna can be used in combination with a tuning switch.
移动通信模块650可以提供应用在电子设备100上的包括2G/3G/4G/5G等无线通信的解决方案。移动通信模块650可以包括至少一个滤波器,开关,功率放大器,低噪声放大器(low noise amplifier,LNA)等。移动通信模块650可以由天线1接收电磁波,并对接收的电磁波进行滤波,放大等处理,传送至调制解调处理器进行解调。移动通信模块650还可以对经调制解调处理器调制后的信号放大,经天线1转为电磁波辐射出去。在一些实施例中,移动通信模块650的至少部分功能模块可以被设置于处理器610中。在一些实施例中,移动通信模块650的至少部分功能模块可以与处理器610的至少部分模块被设置在同一个器件中。The mobile communication module 650 may provide a wireless communication solution including 2G/3G/4G/5G and the like applied to the electronic device 100. The mobile communication module 650 may include at least one filter, switch, power amplifier, low noise amplifier (LNA), and so on. The mobile communication module 650 can receive electromagnetic waves from the antenna 1, filter and amplify the received electromagnetic waves, and transmit them to the modem processor for demodulation. The mobile communication module 650 can also amplify the signal modulated by the modem processor, and convert it into electromagnetic wave radiation via the antenna 1. In some embodiments, at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 650 may be provided in the processor 610. In some embodiments, at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 650 and at least part of the modules of the processor 610 may be provided in the same device.
调制解调处理器可以包括调制器和解调器。其中,调制器用于将待发送的低频基带信号调制成中高频信号。解调器用于将接收的电磁波信号解调为低频基带信号。随后解调器将解调得到的低频基带信号传送至基带处理器处理。低频基带信号经基带处理器处理后,被传递给应用处理器。应用处理器通过音频设备(不限于扬声器670A,受话器670B等)输出声音信号,或通过显示屏694显示图像或视频。在一些实施例中,调制解调处理器可以是独立的器件。在另一些实施例中,调制解调处理器可以独立于处理器610,与移动通信模块650或其他功能模块设置在同一个器件中。The modem processor may include a modulator and a demodulator. Among them, the modulator is used to modulate the low frequency baseband signal to be sent into a medium and high frequency signal. The demodulator is used to demodulate the received electromagnetic wave signal into a low-frequency baseband signal. Then the demodulator transmits the demodulated low-frequency baseband signal to the baseband processor for processing. The low-frequency baseband signal is processed by the baseband processor and then passed to the application processor. The application processor outputs sound signals through audio equipment (not limited to the speaker 670A, the receiver 670B, etc.), or displays images or videos through the display screen 694. In some embodiments, the modem processor may be an independent device. In other embodiments, the modem processor may be independent of the processor 610 and be provided in the same device as the mobile communication module 650 or other functional modules.
无线通信模块660可以提供应用在电子设备100上的包括无线局域网(wireless local area networks,WLAN)(如无线保真(wireless fidelity,Wi-Fi)网络),蓝牙(bluetooth,BT),全球导航卫星***(global navigation satellite system,GNSS),调频(frequency modulation,FM),近距离无线通信技术(near field communication,NFC),红外技术(infrared,IR)等无线通信的解决方案。无线通信模块660可以是集成至少一个通信处理模块的一个或多个器件。无线通信模块660经由天线2接收电磁波,将电磁波信号调频以及滤波处理,将处理后的信号发送到处理器610。无线通信模块660还可以从处理器610接收待发送的信号,对其进行调频,放大,经天线2转为电磁波辐射出去。The wireless communication module 660 can provide applications on the electronic device 100 including wireless local area networks (WLAN) (such as wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi) networks), bluetooth (BT), and global navigation satellites. System (global navigation satellite system, GNSS), frequency modulation (frequency modulation, FM), near field communication technology (near field communication, NFC), infrared technology (infrared, IR) and other wireless communication solutions. The wireless communication module 660 may be one or more devices integrating at least one communication processing module. The wireless communication module 660 receives electromagnetic waves via the antenna 2, frequency modulates and filters the electromagnetic wave signals, and sends the processed signals to the processor 610. The wireless communication module 660 may also receive a signal to be sent from the processor 610, perform frequency modulation, amplify, and convert it into electromagnetic waves to radiate through the antenna 2.
在一些实施例中,电子设备100的天线1和移动通信模块650耦合,天线2和无线通信 模块660耦合,使得电子设备100可以通过无线通信技术与网络以及其他设备通信。所述无线通信技术可以包括全球移动通讯***(global system for mobile communications,GSM),通用分组无线服务(general packet radio service,GPRS),码分多址接入(code division multiple access,CDMA),宽带码分多址(wideband code division multiple access,WCDMA),时分码分多址(time-division code division multiple access,TD-SCDMA),长期演进(long term evolution,LTE),BT,GNSS,WLAN,NFC,FM,和/或IR技术等。所述GNSS可以包括全球卫星定位***(global positioning system,GPS),全球导航卫星***(global navigation satellite system,GLONASS),北斗卫星导航***(beidou navigation satellite system,BDS),准天顶卫星***(quasi-zenith satellite system,QZSS)和/或星基增强***(satellite based augmentation systems,SBAS)。In some embodiments, the antenna 1 of the electronic device 100 is coupled with the mobile communication module 650, and the antenna 2 is coupled with the wireless communication module 660, so that the electronic device 100 can communicate with the network and other devices through wireless communication technology. The wireless communication technologies may include global system for mobile communications (GSM), general packet radio service (GPRS), code division multiple access (CDMA), broadband Code division multiple access (wideband code division multiple access, WCDMA), time-division code division multiple access (TD-SCDMA), long term evolution (LTE), BT, GNSS, WLAN, NFC , FM, and/or IR technology, etc. The GNSS may include global positioning system (GPS), global navigation satellite system (GLONASS), Beidou navigation satellite system (BDS), quasi-zenith satellite system (quasi -zenith satellite system, QZSS) and/or satellite-based augmentation systems (SBAS).
电子设备100通过GPU,显示屏694,以及应用处理器等实现显示功能。GPU为图像处理的微处理器,连接显示屏694和应用处理器。GPU用于执行数学和几何计算,用于图形渲染。处理器610可包括一个或多个GPU,其执行程序指令以生成或改变显示信息。The electronic device 100 implements a display function through a GPU, a display screen 694, and an application processor. The GPU is a microprocessor for image processing, connected to the display 694 and the application processor. The GPU is used to perform mathematical and geometric calculations for graphics rendering. The processor 610 may include one or more GPUs, which execute program instructions to generate or change display information.
显示屏694用于显示图像,视频等。该显示屏694是上述折叠屏(如柔性折叠屏或多屏折叠屏)。显示屏694包括显示面板。显示面板可以采用液晶显示屏(liquid crystal display,LCD),有机发光二极管(organic light-emitting diode,OLED),有源矩阵有机发光二极体或主动矩阵有机发光二极体(active-matrix organic light emitting diode,AMOLED),柔性发光二极管(flex light-emitting diode,FLED),Miniled,MicroLed,Micro-oLed,量子点发光二极管(quantum dot light emitting diodes,QLED)等。The display screen 694 is used to display images, videos, etc. The display screen 694 is the aforementioned folding screen (such as a flexible folding screen or a multi-screen folding screen). The display screen 694 includes a display panel. The display panel can adopt liquid crystal display (LCD), organic light-emitting diode (OLED), active-matrix organic light-emitting diode or active-matrix organic light-emitting diode (active-matrix organic light-emitting diode). emitting diode, AMOLED, flexible light-emitting diode (FLED), Miniled, MicroLed, Micro-oLed, quantum dot light-emitting diode (QLED), etc.
电子设备100可以通过ISP,摄像头693,视频编解码器,GPU,显示屏694以及应用处理器等实现拍摄功能。The electronic device 100 may implement a shooting function through an ISP, a camera 693, a video codec, a GPU, a display screen 694, and an application processor.
ISP用于处理摄像头693反馈的数据。例如,拍照时,打开快门,光线通过镜头被传递到摄像头感光元件上,光信号转换为电信号,摄像头感光元件将所述电信号传递给ISP处理,转化为肉眼可见的图像。ISP还可以对图像的噪点,亮度,肤色进行算法优化。ISP还可以对拍摄场景的曝光,色温等参数优化。在一些实施例中,ISP可以设置在摄像头693中。The ISP is used to process the data fed back from the camera 693. For example, when taking a picture, the shutter is opened, the light is transmitted to the photosensitive element of the camera through the lens, the light signal is converted into an electrical signal, and the photosensitive element of the camera transfers the electrical signal to the ISP for processing and is converted into an image visible to the naked eye. ISP can also optimize the image noise, brightness, and skin color. ISP can also optimize the exposure, color temperature and other parameters of the shooting scene. In some embodiments, the ISP may be provided in the camera 693.
摄像头693用于捕获静态图像或视频。物体通过镜头生成光学图像投射到感光元件。感光元件可以是电荷耦合器件(charge coupled device,CCD)或互补金属氧化物半导体(complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor,CMOS)光电晶体管。感光元件把光信号转换成电信号,之后将电信号传递给ISP转换成数字图像信号。ISP将数字图像信号输出到DSP加工处理。DSP将数字图像信号转换成标准的RGB,YUV等格式的图像信号。在一些实施例中,电子设备100可以包括1个或N个摄像头693,N为大于1的正整数。The camera 693 is used to capture still images or videos. The object generates an optical image through the lens and projects it to the photosensitive element. The photosensitive element may be a charge coupled device (CCD) or a complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistor. The photosensitive element converts the optical signal into an electrical signal, and then transmits the electrical signal to the ISP to convert it into a digital image signal. ISP outputs digital image signals to DSP for processing. DSP converts digital image signals into standard RGB, YUV and other formats. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 may include 1 or N cameras 693, and N is a positive integer greater than 1.
数字信号处理器用于处理数字信号,除了可以处理数字图像信号,还可以处理其他数字信号。例如,当电子设备100在频点选择时,数字信号处理器用于对频点能量进行傅里叶变换等。Digital signal processors are used to process digital signals. In addition to digital image signals, they can also process other digital signals. For example, when the electronic device 100 selects the frequency point, the digital signal processor is used to perform Fourier transform on the energy of the frequency point.
视频编解码器用于对数字视频压缩或解压缩。电子设备100可以支持一种或多种视频编解码器。这样,电子设备100可以播放或录制多种编码格式的视频,例如:动态图像专家组(moving picture experts group,MPEG)1,MPEG2,MPEG3,MPEG4等。Video codecs are used to compress or decompress digital video. The electronic device 100 may support one or more video codecs. In this way, the electronic device 100 can play or record videos in a variety of encoding formats, such as: moving picture experts group (MPEG) 1, MPEG2, MPEG3, MPEG4, and so on.
NPU为神经网络(neural-network,NN)计算处理器,通过借鉴生物神经网络结构,例如借鉴人脑神经元之间传递模式,对输入信息快速处理,还可以不断的自学习。通过NPU可以实现电子设备100的智能认知等应用,例如:图像识别,人脸识别,语音识别,文本理解等。NPU is a neural-network (NN) computing processor. By drawing on the structure of biological neural networks, for example, the transfer mode between human brain neurons, it can quickly process input information and can continuously learn by itself. The NPU can realize applications such as intelligent cognition of the electronic device 100, such as image recognition, face recognition, voice recognition, text understanding, and so on.
外部存储器接口620可以用于连接外部存储卡,例如Micro SD卡,实现扩展电子设备100的存储能力。外部存储卡通过外部存储器接口620与处理器610通信,实现数据存储功能。例如将音乐,视频等文件保存在外部存储卡中。The external memory interface 620 may be used to connect an external memory card, such as a Micro SD card, so as to expand the storage capacity of the electronic device 100. The external memory card communicates with the processor 610 through the external memory interface 620 to realize the data storage function. For example, save music, video and other files in an external memory card.
内部存储器621可以用于存储计算机可执行程序代码,所述可执行程序代码包括指令。处理器610通过运行存储在内部存储器621的指令,从而执行电子设备100的各种功能应用以及数据处理。例如,在本申请实施例中,处理器610可以通过执行存储在内部存储器621中的指令,响应于用户在显示屏694(即折叠屏)的第一操作或第二操作,在显示屏684(即折叠屏)显示对应的显示内容。内部存储器621可以包括存储程序区和存储数据区。其中,存储程序区可存储操作***,至少一个功能所需的应用程序(比如声音播放功能,图像播放功能等)等。存储数据区可存储电子设备100使用过程中所创建的数据(比如音频数据,电话本等)等。此外,内部存储器621可以包括高速随机存取存储器,还可以包括非易失性存储器,例如至少一个磁盘存储器件,闪存器件,通用闪存存储器(universal flash storage,UFS)等。The internal memory 621 may be used to store computer executable program code, where the executable program code includes instructions. The processor 610 executes various functional applications and data processing of the electronic device 100 by running instructions stored in the internal memory 621. For example, in the embodiment of the present application, the processor 610 may execute the instructions stored in the internal memory 621 to respond to the user's first operation or second operation on the display screen 694 (ie, the folding screen), and the display screen 684 ( That is, the folding screen) displays the corresponding display content. The internal memory 621 may include a program storage area and a data storage area. Among them, the storage program area can store an operating system, at least one application program (such as a sound playback function, an image playback function, etc.) required by at least one function. The data storage area can store data (such as audio data, phone book, etc.) created during the use of the electronic device 100. In addition, the internal memory 621 may include a high-speed random access memory, and may also include a non-volatile memory, such as at least one magnetic disk storage device, a flash memory device, a universal flash storage (UFS), and the like.
电子设备100可以通过音频模块670,扬声器670A,受话器670B,麦克风670C,耳机接口670D,以及应用处理器等实现音频功能。例如音乐播放,录音等。The electronic device 100 can implement audio functions through an audio module 670, a speaker 670A, a receiver 670B, a microphone 670C, a headphone interface 670D, and an application processor. For example, music playback, recording, etc.
音频模块670用于将数字音频信息转换成模拟音频信号输出,也用于将模拟音频输入转换为数字音频信号。音频模块670还可以用于对音频信号编码和解码。在一些实施例中,音频模块670可以设置于处理器610中,或将音频模块670的部分功能模块设置于处理器610中。扬声器670A,也称“喇叭”,用于将音频电信号转换为声音信号。电子设备100可以通过扬声器670A收听音乐,或收听免提通话。受话器670B,也称“听筒”,用于将音频电信号转换成声音信号。当电子设备100接听电话或语音信息时,可以通过将受话器670B靠近人耳接听语音。麦克风670C,也称“话筒”,“传声器”,用于将声音信号转换为电信号。当拨打电话或发送语音信息或需要通过语音助手触发电子设备100执行某些功能时,用户可以通过人嘴靠近麦克风670C发声,将声音信号输入到麦克风670C。电子设备100可以设置至少一个麦克风670C。在另一些实施例中,电子设备100可以设置两个麦克风670C,除了采集声音信号,还可以实现降噪功能。在另一些实施例中,电子设备100还可以设置三个,四个或更多麦克风670C,实现采集声音信号,降噪,还可以识别声音来源,实现定向录音功能等。The audio module 670 is used to convert digital audio information into an analog audio signal for output, and is also used to convert an analog audio input into a digital audio signal. The audio module 670 can also be used to encode and decode audio signals. In some embodiments, the audio module 670 may be provided in the processor 610, or some functional modules of the audio module 670 may be provided in the processor 610. The speaker 670A, also called "speaker", is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals. The electronic device 100 can listen to music through the speaker 670A, or listen to a hands-free call. The receiver 670B, also called "earpiece", is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals. When the electronic device 100 answers a call or voice message, it can receive the voice by bringing the receiver 670B close to the human ear. Microphone 670C, also called "microphone" or "microphone", is used to convert sound signals into electrical signals. When making a call or sending voice information or when the electronic device 100 needs to be triggered to perform certain functions through a voice assistant, the user can approach the microphone 670C through the mouth to make a sound, and input the sound signal into the microphone 670C. The electronic device 100 may be provided with at least one microphone 670C. In other embodiments, the electronic device 100 can be provided with two microphones 670C, which can implement noise reduction functions in addition to collecting sound signals. In other embodiments, the electronic device 100 may also be provided with three, four or more microphones 670C to collect sound signals, reduce noise, identify sound sources, and realize directional recording functions.
耳机接口670D用于连接有线耳机。耳机接口670D可以是USB接口630,也可以是3.5mm的开放移动电子设备平台(open mobile terminal platform,OMTP)标准接口,美国蜂窝电信工业协会(cellular telecommunications industry association of the USA,CTIA)标准接口。The earphone interface 670D is used to connect wired earphones. The earphone interface 670D may be a USB interface 630, or a 3.5mm open mobile terminal platform (OMTP) standard interface, and a cellular telecommunications industry association (cellular telecommunications industry association of the USA, CTIA) standard interface.
压力传感器680A用于感受压力信号,可以将压力信号转换成电信号。在一些实施例中,压力传感器680A可以设置于显示屏694。压力传感器680A的种类很多,如电阻式压力传感器,电感式压力传感器,电容式压力传感器等。电容式压力传感器可以是包括至少两个具有导电材料的平行板。当有力作用于压力传感器680A,电极之间的电容改变。电子设备100根据电容的变化确定压力的强度。当有触摸操作作用于显示屏694,电子设备100根据压力传感器680A检测所述触摸操作强度。电子设备100也可以根据压力传感器680A的检测信号计算触摸的位置。在一些实施例中,作用于相同触摸位置,但不同触摸操作强度的触摸操作,可以对应不同的操作指令。例如:当有触摸操作强度小于第一压力阈值的触摸操作作用于短消息应用图标时,执行查看短消息的指令。当有触摸操作强度大于或等于第一压力阈值的触摸操作作用于短消息应用图标时,执行新建短消息的指令。The pressure sensor 680A is used to sense the pressure signal and can convert the pressure signal into an electrical signal. In some embodiments, the pressure sensor 680A may be provided on the display screen 694. There are many types of pressure sensor 680A, such as resistive pressure sensor, inductive pressure sensor, capacitive pressure sensor and so on. The capacitive pressure sensor may include at least two parallel plates with conductive material. When a force is applied to the pressure sensor 680A, the capacitance between the electrodes changes. The electronic device 100 determines the intensity of the pressure according to the change in capacitance. When a touch operation acts on the display screen 694, the electronic device 100 detects the intensity of the touch operation according to the pressure sensor 680A. The electronic device 100 may also calculate the touched position according to the detection signal of the pressure sensor 680A. In some embodiments, touch operations that act on the same touch location but have different touch operation strengths may correspond to different operation instructions. For example: when a touch operation whose intensity of the touch operation is less than the first pressure threshold is applied to the short message application icon, an instruction to view the short message is executed. When a touch operation with a touch operation intensity greater than or equal to the first pressure threshold acts on the short message application icon, an instruction to create a new short message is executed.
陀螺仪传感器680B可以用于确定电子设备100的运动姿态。在一些实施例中,可以通 过陀螺仪传感器680B确定电子设备100围绕三个轴(即,x,y和z轴)的角速度。陀螺仪传感器680B可以用于拍摄防抖。示例性的,当按下快门,陀螺仪传感器680B检测电子设备100抖动的角度,根据角度计算出镜头模组需要补偿的距离,让镜头通过反向运动抵消电子设备100的抖动,实现防抖。陀螺仪传感器680B还可以用于导航,体感游戏场景。本申请实施例中,电子设备100的显示屏694可折叠形成多个屏。每个屏中可以包括陀螺仪传感器680B,用于测量对应屏的朝向(即朝向的方向向量)。电子设备100可以根据测量得到的每个屏的朝向的角度变化,可以确定出相邻屏的夹角。The gyro sensor 680B may be used to determine the movement posture of the electronic device 100. In some embodiments, the angular velocity of the electronic device 100 around three axes (i.e., x, y, and z axes) can be determined by the gyroscope sensor 680B. The gyro sensor 680B can be used for image stabilization. Exemplarily, when the shutter is pressed, the gyro sensor 680B detects the shake angle of the electronic device 100, calculates the distance that the lens module needs to compensate according to the angle, and allows the lens to counteract the shake of the electronic device 100 through a reverse movement to achieve anti-shake. The gyro sensor 680B can also be used for navigation and somatosensory game scenes. In the embodiment of the present application, the display screen 694 of the electronic device 100 can be folded to form multiple screens. Each screen may include a gyroscope sensor 680B for measuring the orientation of the corresponding screen (ie, the direction vector of the orientation). The electronic device 100 can determine the angle between adjacent screens according to the measured angle change of the orientation of each screen.
气压传感器680C用于测量气压。在一些实施例中,电子设备100通过气压传感器680C测得的气压值计算海拔高度,辅助定位和导航。The air pressure sensor 680C is used to measure air pressure. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 calculates the altitude based on the air pressure value measured by the air pressure sensor 680C, and assists positioning and navigation.
磁传感器680D包括霍尔传感器。电子设备100可以利用磁传感器680D检测翻盖皮套的开合。在一些实施例中,当电子设备100是翻盖机时,电子设备100可以根据磁传感器680D检测翻盖的开合。进而根据检测到的皮套的开合状态或翻盖的开合状态,设置翻盖自动解锁等特性。The magnetic sensor 680D includes a Hall sensor. The electronic device 100 can use the magnetic sensor 680D to detect the opening and closing of the flip holster. In some embodiments, when the electronic device 100 is a flip machine, the electronic device 100 can detect the opening and closing of the flip according to the magnetic sensor 680D. Furthermore, according to the detected opening and closing state of the leather case or the opening and closing state of the flip cover, features such as automatic unlocking of the flip cover are set.
加速度传感器680E可检测电子设备100在各个方向上(一般为三轴)加速度的大小。当电子设备100静止时可检测出重力的大小及方向。还可以用于识别电子设备姿态,应用于横竖屏切换,计步器等应用。需要注意的是,在本申请实施例中,电子设备100的显示屏694可折叠形成多个屏。每个屏中可以包括加速度传感器680E,用于测量对应屏的朝向(即朝向的方向向量)。The acceleration sensor 680E can detect the magnitude of the acceleration of the electronic device 100 in various directions (generally three-axis). When the electronic device 100 is stationary, the magnitude and direction of gravity can be detected. It can also be used to identify the posture of electronic devices, and used in applications such as horizontal and vertical screen switching, pedometers and so on. It should be noted that in this embodiment of the present application, the display screen 694 of the electronic device 100 can be folded to form multiple screens. Each screen may include an acceleration sensor 680E for measuring the orientation of the corresponding screen (that is, the direction vector of the orientation).
距离传感器680F,用于测量距离。电子设备100可以通过红外或激光测量距离。在一些实施例中,拍摄场景,电子设备100可以利用距离传感器680F测距以实现快速对焦。Distance sensor 680F, used to measure distance. The electronic device 100 can measure the distance by infrared or laser. In some embodiments, when shooting a scene, the electronic device 100 can use the distance sensor 680F to measure the distance to achieve fast focusing.
接近光传感器680G可以包括例如发光二极管(LED)和光检测器,例如光电二极管。发光二极管可以是红外发光二极管。电子设备100通过发光二极管向外发射红外光。电子设备100使用光电二极管检测来自附近物体的红外反射光。当检测到充分的反射光时,可以确定电子设备100附近有物体。当检测到不充分的反射光时,电子设备100可以确定电子设备100附近没有物体。电子设备100可以利用接近光传感器680G检测用户手持电子设备100贴近耳朵通话,以便自动熄灭屏幕达到省电的目的。接近光传感器680G也可用于皮套模式,口袋模式自动解锁与锁屏。The proximity light sensor 680G may include, for example, a light emitting diode (LED) and a light detector such as a photodiode. The light emitting diode may be an infrared light emitting diode. The electronic device 100 emits infrared light to the outside through the light emitting diode. The electronic device 100 uses a photodiode to detect infrared reflected light from nearby objects. When sufficient reflected light is detected, it can be determined that there is an object near the electronic device 100. When insufficient reflected light is detected, the electronic device 100 can determine that there is no object near the electronic device 100. The electronic device 100 can use the proximity light sensor 680G to detect that the user holds the electronic device 100 close to the ear to talk, so as to automatically turn off the screen to save power. The proximity light sensor 680G can also be used in leather case mode, and the pocket mode will automatically unlock and lock the screen.
环境光传感器680L用于感知环境光亮度。电子设备100可以根据感知的环境光亮度自适应调节显示屏694亮度。环境光传感器680L也可用于拍照时自动调节白平衡。环境光传感器680L还可以与接近光传感器680G配合,检测电子设备100是否在口袋里,以防误触。The ambient light sensor 680L is used to sense the brightness of the ambient light. The electronic device 100 can adaptively adjust the brightness of the display screen 694 according to the perceived brightness of the ambient light. The ambient light sensor 680L can also be used to automatically adjust the white balance when taking pictures. The ambient light sensor 680L can also cooperate with the proximity light sensor 680G to detect whether the electronic device 100 is in the pocket to prevent accidental touch.
指纹传感器680H用于采集指纹。电子设备100可以利用采集的指纹特性实现指纹解锁,访问应用锁,指纹拍照,指纹接听来电等。The fingerprint sensor 680H is used to collect fingerprints. The electronic device 100 can use the collected fingerprint characteristics to realize fingerprint unlocking, access application locks, fingerprint photographs, fingerprint answering calls, etc.
温度传感器680J用于检测温度。在一些实施例中,电子设备100利用温度传感器680J检测的温度,执行温度处理策略。例如,当温度传感器680J上报的温度超过阈值,电子设备100执行降低位于温度传感器680J附近的处理器的性能,以便降低功耗实施热保护。在另一些实施例中,当温度低于另一阈值时,电子设备100对电池642加热,以避免低温导致电子设备100异常关机。在其他一些实施例中,当温度低于又一阈值时,电子设备100对电池642的输出电压执行升压,以避免低温导致的异常关机。The temperature sensor 680J is used to detect temperature. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 uses the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 680J to execute a temperature processing strategy. For example, when the temperature reported by the temperature sensor 680J exceeds a threshold value, the electronic device 100 reduces the performance of the processor located near the temperature sensor 680J, so as to reduce power consumption and implement thermal protection. In other embodiments, when the temperature is lower than another threshold, the electronic device 100 heats the battery 642 to avoid abnormal shutdown of the electronic device 100 due to low temperature. In some other embodiments, when the temperature is lower than another threshold, the electronic device 100 boosts the output voltage of the battery 642 to avoid abnormal shutdown caused by low temperature.
触摸传感器680K,也称“触控面板”。触摸传感器680K可以设置于显示屏694,由触摸传感器680K与显示屏694组成触摸屏,也称“触控屏”。触摸传感器680K用于检测作用于其上或附近的触摸操作。触摸传感器可以将检测到的触摸操作传递给应用处理器,以确定触摸 事件类型。可以通过显示屏694提供与触摸操作相关的视觉输出。在另一些实施例中,触摸传感器680K也可以设置于电子设备100的表面,与显示屏694所处的位置不同。Touch sensor 680K, also known as "touch panel". The touch sensor 680K can be arranged on the display screen 694, and the touch screen is composed of the touch sensor 680K and the display screen 694, which is also called a “touch screen”. The touch sensor 680K is used to detect touch operations acting on or near it. The touch sensor can pass the detected touch operation to the application processor to determine the type of touch event. The visual output related to the touch operation can be provided through the display screen 694. In other embodiments, the touch sensor 680K may also be disposed on the surface of the electronic device 100, which is different from the position of the display screen 694.
骨传导传感器680M可以获取振动信号。在一些实施例中,骨传导传感器680M可以获取人体声部振动骨块的振动信号。骨传导传感器680M也可以接触人体脉搏,接收血压跳动信号。在一些实施例中,骨传导传感器680M也可以设置于耳机中,结合成骨传导耳机。音频模块670可以基于所述骨传导传感器680M获取的声部振动骨块的振动信号,解析出语音信号,实现语音功能。应用处理器可以基于所述骨传导传感器680M获取的血压跳动信号解析心率信息,实现心率检测功能。The bone conduction sensor 680M can acquire vibration signals. In some embodiments, the bone conduction sensor 680M can obtain the vibration signal of the vibrating bone mass of the human voice. The bone conduction sensor 680M can also contact the human pulse and receive blood pressure pulse signals. In some embodiments, the bone conduction sensor 680M may also be provided in the earphone, combined with the bone conduction earphone. The audio module 670 can parse the voice signal based on the vibration signal of the vibrating bone block of the voice obtained by the bone conduction sensor 680M, and realize the voice function. The application processor may analyze the heart rate information based on the blood pressure beating signal obtained by the bone conduction sensor 680M, and realize the heart rate detection function.
按键690包括开机键,音量键等。按键690可以是机械按键。也可以是触摸式按键。电子设备100可以接收按键输入,产生与电子设备100的用户设置以及功能控制有关的键信号输入。The button 690 includes a power button, a volume button and so on. The button 690 may be a mechanical button. It can also be a touch button. The electronic device 100 may receive key input, and generate key signal input related to user settings and function control of the electronic device 100.
马达691可以产生振动提示。马达691可以用于来电振动提示,也可以用于触摸振动反馈。例如,作用于不同应用(例如拍照,音频播放等)的触摸操作,可以对应不同的振动反馈效果。作用于显示屏694不同区域的触摸操作,马达691也可对应不同的振动反馈效果。不同的应用场景(例如:时间提醒,接收信息,闹钟,游戏等)也可以对应不同的振动反馈效果。触摸振动反馈效果还可以支持自定义。The motor 691 can generate vibration prompts. The motor 691 can be used for incoming call vibrating prompts, and can also be used for touch vibration feedback. For example, touch operations applied to different applications (such as photographing, audio playback, etc.) can correspond to different vibration feedback effects. Acting on touch operations in different areas of the display screen 694, the motor 691 can also correspond to different vibration feedback effects. Different application scenarios (for example: time reminding, receiving information, alarm clock, games, etc.) can also correspond to different vibration feedback effects. The touch vibration feedback effect can also support customization.
指示器692可以是指示灯,可以用于指示充电状态,电量变化,也可以用于指示消息,未接来电,通知等。The indicator 692 can be an indicator light, which can be used to indicate the charging status, power change, and can also be used to indicate messages, missed calls, notifications, and so on.
SIM卡接口695用于连接SIM卡。SIM卡可以通过***SIM卡接口695,或从SIM卡接口695拔出,实现和电子设备100的接触和分离。电子设备100可以支持1个或N个SIM卡接口,N为大于1的正整数。SIM卡接口695可以支持Nano SIM卡,Micro SIM卡,SIM卡等。同一个SIM卡接口695可以同时***多张卡。所述多张卡的类型可以相同,也可以不同。SIM卡接口695也可以兼容不同类型的SIM卡。SIM卡接口695也可以兼容外部存储卡。电子设备100通过SIM卡和网络交互,实现通话以及数据通信等功能。在一些实施例中,电子设备100采用eSIM,即:嵌入式SIM卡。eSIM卡可以嵌在电子设备100中,不能和电子设备100分离。The SIM card interface 695 is used to connect to the SIM card. The SIM card can be inserted into the SIM card interface 695 or pulled out from the SIM card interface 695 to achieve contact and separation with the electronic device 100. The electronic device 100 may support 1 or N SIM card interfaces, and N is a positive integer greater than 1. The SIM card interface 695 can support Nano SIM cards, Micro SIM cards, SIM cards, etc. The same SIM card interface 695 can insert multiple cards at the same time. The types of the multiple cards can be the same or different. The SIM card interface 695 can also be compatible with different types of SIM cards. The SIM card interface 695 can also be compatible with external memory cards. The electronic device 100 interacts with the network through the SIM card to implement functions such as call and data communication. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 adopts an eSIM, that is, an embedded SIM card. The eSIM card can be embedded in the electronic device 100 and cannot be separated from the electronic device 100.
以下实施例中的方法均可以在具有上述硬件结构的电子设备100中实现。The methods in the following embodiments can all be implemented in the electronic device 100 having the above hardware structure.
本申请实施例提供一种应用显示方法。该方法可以应用于上述电子设备100的折叠屏被展开的情况下。例如,如图7C所示,电子设备100处于展开状态。在本申请实施例中,以电子设备100的折叠屏是图1中的(a)所示的柔性折叠屏为例,对本申请实施例提供的应用显示方法进行说明。The embodiment of the present application provides an application display method. This method can be applied in the case where the folding screen of the above-mentioned electronic device 100 is unfolded. For example, as shown in FIG. 7C, the electronic device 100 is in an unfolded state. In the embodiment of the present application, taking the folding screen of the electronic device 100 as the flexible folding screen shown in (a) in FIG. 1 as an example, the application display method provided in the embodiment of the present application will be described.
请参考图7A,本申请实施例提供的应用显示方法可以包括S701-S703。Please refer to FIG. 7A. The application display method provided by the embodiment of the present application may include S701-S703.
S701:电子设备100在折叠屏显示第一应用的第一界面。S701: The electronic device 100 displays the first interface of the first application on the folding screen.
在一些实施例中,电子设备100在折叠屏显示第一应用的第一界面,具体可以为:电子设备100在折叠屏的第一显示区域和第二显示区域,显示第一界面。需要注意的是,S701中,折叠屏不显示第一应用的第二界面。例如,图7C所示的折叠屏沿着折叠边可以分为第一屏701(对应第一显示区域)和第二屏702(对应第二显示区域)。图7C所示的电子设备100可以在折叠屏的第一屏701和第二屏702,显示第一界面703,不显示其他界面(如第二界面)。即电子设备100可以采用图5或图7C所示的全屏显示的方式显示上述第一界面。In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 displays the first interface of the first application on the folding screen. Specifically, the electronic device 100 displays the first interface in the first display area and the second display area of the folding screen. It should be noted that in S701, the folding screen does not display the second interface of the first application. For example, the folding screen shown in FIG. 7C can be divided into a first screen 701 (corresponding to the first display area) and a second screen 702 (corresponding to the second display area) along the folding edge. The electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 7C may display the first interface 703 on the first screen 701 and the second screen 702 of the folding screen, and no other interfaces (such as the second interface) may be displayed. That is, the electronic device 100 may display the above-mentioned first interface in a full-screen display manner as shown in FIG. 5 or FIG. 7C.
在另一些实施例中,电子设备100可以采用图4中的(a)或图4中的(b)所示的方式显示第一界面。本申请实施例中,对电子设备100显示第一界面的具体方式不作限制。In other embodiments, the electronic device 100 may display the first interface in the manner shown in FIG. 4(a) or FIG. 4(b). In the embodiment of the present application, the specific manner in which the electronic device 100 displays the first interface is not limited.
其中,本申请实施例的后续描述中,以电子设备100采用图5或图7C所示的全屏显示的方式显示第一界面为例,对本申请实施例的方法进行说明。Among them, in the subsequent description of the embodiment of the present application, the method of the embodiment of the present application will be described by taking the electronic device 100 displaying the first interface in the full-screen display mode shown in FIG. 5 or FIG. 7C as an example.
需要注意的是,电子设备100在折叠屏显示第一应用的第一界面时,该折叠屏上不会显示其他的界面。例如,如图5、图7C、图4中的(a)或图4中的(b)所示,电子设备100在折叠屏显示第一界面时,未显示其他的界面。It should be noted that when the electronic device 100 displays the first interface of the first application on the folding screen, no other interfaces are displayed on the folding screen. For example, as shown in FIG. 5, FIG. 7C, (a) in FIG. 4, or (b) in FIG. 4, when the electronic device 100 displays the first interface on the folding screen, other interfaces are not displayed.
在本申请实施例的应用场景(1)中,上述第一界面可以是第一应用的首页。例如,第一界面可以是图5所示的第一界面501。该第一界面501是“头条”应用的首页。其中,电子设备100显示第一应用的第一界面可以包括以下情况(1)和情况(2)。In the application scenario (1) of the embodiment of the present application, the above-mentioned first interface may be the homepage of the first application. For example, the first interface may be the first interface 501 shown in FIG. 5. The first interface 501 is the homepage of the "Toutiao" application. The electronic device 100 displaying the first interface of the first application may include the following cases (1) and (2).
情况(1):上述第一应用的首页是电子设备100将第一应用退出运行(即停止在折叠屏显示第一应用的界面,且后台停止运行第一应用)后,响应于用户对电子设备100的主界面(即桌面)中的第一应用的图标的点击操作(如单击操作)显示的。或者,上述第一应用的首页是电子设备100开机后,第一次响应于用户对电子设备100的主界面(即桌面)中的第一应用的图标的点击操作(如单击操作)显示的。Case (1): The homepage of the above-mentioned first application is that after the electronic device 100 exits the first application (that is, stops displaying the interface of the first application on the folding screen, and stops running the first application in the background), it responds to the user's request to the electronic device A click operation (such as a single click operation) of the icon of the first application in the main interface (ie desktop) of 100 is displayed. Alternatively, the home page of the first application mentioned above is displayed for the first time in response to a user's click operation (such as a single click operation) on the icon of the first application in the main interface (ie desktop) of the electronic device 100 after the electronic device 100 is turned on. .
例如,电子设备100可以响应于用户对电子设备100的主界面(即桌面)中的“头条”应用的图标的点击操作(如单击操作),显示图5所示的第一界面501。For example, the electronic device 100 may display the first interface 501 shown in FIG. 5 in response to a user's click operation (such as a single click operation) on the icon of the "headline" application in the main interface (ie desktop) of the electronic device 100.
情况(2):电子设备100可以响应于用户对第一应用的首页的下一层级的界面中“返回”按钮的点击操作(如单击操作),显示第一应用的首页。Case (2): The electronic device 100 may display the home page of the first application in response to a user's click operation (such as a click operation) of the "return" button in the next level interface of the home page of the first application.
例如,图7C所示的“台风山竹”新闻界面703是电子设备100响应于用户对图5所示的“头条”应用的首页501中“台风山竹”新闻项502的点击操作(如单击操作),显示的“头条”应用的首页501的下一层级的界面。电子设备100可以响应于用户对图7C所示的“台风山竹”新闻界面703中的“返回”按钮704的点击操作(如单击操作),显示图5所示的“头条”应用的首页501。For example, the "Typhoon Mangkhut" news interface 703 shown in FIG. 7C is the electronic device 100 responding to the user's click operation (such as a single click operation) on the "Typhoon Mangkhut" news item 502 in the home page 501 of the "Toutiao" application shown in FIG. ), the next level interface of the home page 501 of the displayed "Toutiao" application. The electronic device 100 may respond to a user's click operation (such as a click operation) on the "return" button 704 in the "Typhoon Mangosteen" news interface 703 shown in FIG. 7C, and display the home page 501 of the "Toutiao" application shown in FIG. 5 .
在本申请实施例的应用场景(2)中,上述第一界面是第一应用的其他界面。该其他界面是第一应用的界面中除第一应用的首页之外的任一界面。例如,第一界面可以是图7C所示的第一界面703,第一界面703是“台风山竹”新闻界面703。其中,“台风山竹”新闻界面703不是“头条”应用不是首页。In the application scenario (2) of the embodiment of the present application, the above-mentioned first interface is another interface of the first application. The other interface is any interface in the interface of the first application except the home page of the first application. For example, the first interface may be the first interface 703 shown in FIG. 7C, and the first interface 703 is the "Typhoon Mangkhut" news interface 703. Among them, the "Typhoon Mangkhut" news interface 703 is not the "Headline" application, not the homepage.
S702:电子设备100接收用户在折叠屏的第一操作,该第一操作用于触发折叠屏以双窗口显示第一应用的两个界面。S702: The electronic device 100 receives a user's first operation on the folding screen, and the first operation is used to trigger the folding screen to display two interfaces of the first application in dual windows.
其中,电子设备100可以在折叠屏显示上述第一界面时,接收用户在折叠屏的第一操作。本申请实施例中,折叠屏以双窗口显示第一应用的界面,具体可以为:折叠屏在两个显示区域同时显示第一应用的两个界面。一个显示区域显示第一应用的一个界面。每个显示区域显示的界面可以相同,也可以不同。Wherein, the electronic device 100 may receive the first operation of the user on the folding screen when the first interface is displayed on the folding screen. In the embodiment of the present application, the folding screen displays the interface of the first application in dual windows, which may specifically be: the folding screen simultaneously displays two interfaces of the first application in two display areas. A display area displays an interface of the first application. The interface displayed in each display area can be the same or different.
S703:响应于第一操作,电子设备100在折叠屏的第一显示区域显示第一界面的第一内容,在折叠屏的第二显示区域显示第一应用的第二界面。S703: In response to the first operation, the electronic device 100 displays the first content of the first interface in the first display area of the folding screen, and displays the second interface of the first application in the second display area of the folding screen.
其中,第一内容可以是第一界面的全部内容,也可以是第一界面的部分内容。本申请实施例的附图中,以第一内容是第一界面的全部内容为例进行说明。Wherein, the first content may be the entire content of the first interface or part of the content of the first interface. In the drawings of the embodiments of the present application, the first content is the entire content of the first interface as an example for description.
其中,第一显示区域和第二显示区域均为折叠屏的显示区域的一部分。该第一显示区域和第二显示区域之间没有重叠。Wherein, the first display area and the second display area are both part of the display area of the folding screen. There is no overlap between the first display area and the second display area.
在实现方式(1)中,第一显示区域是第一屏对应的显示区域,第二显示区域是第二屏对应的显示区域。具体的,以折叠屏的折叠边为界,当用户面对展开的折叠屏时,折叠屏上折叠边的右侧为第一显示区域,折叠屏上折叠边的左侧为第二显示区域;或者,折叠屏上折叠 边的左侧为第一显示区域,折叠屏上折叠边的右侧为第二显示区域。这样,更符合多数用户对折叠屏电子设备的使用习惯。例如,如图7B中的(a)所示,第一显示区域和第二显示区域的分割线A与电子设备100的折叠屏的折叠边重合。该实施例中,第一显示区域对应第一屏,第二显示区域对应第二屏。In the implementation (1), the first display area is a display area corresponding to the first screen, and the second display area is a display area corresponding to the second screen. Specifically, taking the folding edge of the folding screen as the boundary, when the user faces the unfolded folding screen, the right side of the folding edge on the folding screen is the first display area, and the left side of the folding edge on the folding screen is the second display area; Alternatively, the left side of the folding edge on the folding screen is the first display area, and the right side of the folding edge on the folding screen is the second display area. In this way, it is more in line with most users' habits of using folding screen electronic devices. For example, as shown in (a) of FIG. 7B, the dividing line A of the first display area and the second display area coincides with the folding edge of the folding screen of the electronic device 100. In this embodiment, the first display area corresponds to the first screen, and the second display area corresponds to the second screen.
在实现方式(2)中,上述第一显示区域和第二显示区域的尺寸(包括宽和高)可以预先配置在电子设备100中。或者,上述第一显示区域和第二显示区域的宽和高可以由用户在电子设备100中设置。其中,用户设置第一显示区域和第二显示区域的方法可以参考图12-图14的相关介绍,这里不予赘述。在该实施例中,上述第一显示区域的尺寸和第二显示区域的尺寸可以相同,也可以不同。In the implementation (2), the sizes (including width and height) of the above-mentioned first display area and the second display area may be pre-configured in the electronic device 100. Alternatively, the width and height of the first display area and the second display area may be set in the electronic device 100 by the user. For the method for the user to set the first display area and the second display area, reference may be made to the related introductions in FIG. 12 to FIG. 14, which will not be repeated here. In this embodiment, the size of the first display area and the size of the second display area may be the same or different.
例如,如图7B中的(b)所示,第一显示区域的尺寸和第二显示区域的尺寸相同。图7B中的(b)中,第一显示区域和第二显示区域以分割线B为界,第一显示区域的高和第二显示区域的高相同,且第一显示区域的宽和第二显示区域的宽均为长度L。For example, as shown in (b) of FIG. 7B, the size of the first display area and the size of the second display area are the same. In (b) of FIG. 7B, the first display area and the second display area are bounded by the dividing line B, the height of the first display area is the same as the height of the second display area, and the width of the first display area is the same as that of the second display area. The width of the display area is the length L.
又例如,如图7B中的(c)所示,第一显示区域的尺寸和第二显示区域的尺寸不同。图7B中的(c)中,第一显示区域和第二显示区域以分割线C为界,第一显示区域的小于第二显示区域。For another example, as shown in (c) of FIG. 7B, the size of the first display area and the size of the second display area are different. In (c) of FIG. 7B, the first display area and the second display area are bounded by the dividing line C, and the first display area is smaller than the second display area.
又例如,如图7B中的(d)所示,第一显示区域的尺寸和第二显示区域的尺寸不同。图7B中的(d)中,第一显示区域和第二显示区域以分割线D为界,第一显示区域的大于第二显示区域。For another example, as shown in (d) of FIG. 7B, the size of the first display area and the size of the second display area are different. In (d) of FIG. 7B, the first display area and the second display area are bounded by the dividing line D, and the first display area is larger than the second display area.
在一些实施例中,折叠屏在折叠状态下,第一屏作为主屏显示手机的主界面或者应用界面(如第一界面或第二内容),第二屏可以黑屏。如此,响应于折叠屏由展开状态转换为折叠状态,第一屏可显示上述第一界面或第二内容。In some embodiments, when the folding screen is in the folded state, the first screen is used as the main screen to display the main interface or application interface (such as the first interface or the second content) of the mobile phone, and the second screen may be black. In this way, in response to the folding screen transitioning from the expanded state to the folded state, the first screen may display the above-mentioned first interface or second content.
其中,以响应于折叠屏由展开状态转换为折叠状态,第一屏显示第一界面为例。折叠屏在展开状态,由折叠屏的第一显示区域显示第一界面;折叠屏在折叠状态,由第一屏显示第一界面。在上述实现方式(2)中,第一屏对应的显示区域与第一显示区域可能不同。如此,折叠屏在展开状态时第一显示区域上显示的第一界面,与折叠屏在折叠状态时第一屏显示的第一界面的界面布局则可能不同。Among them, in response to the folding screen transitioning from the expanded state to the folded state, the first screen displays the first interface as an example. When the folding screen is in the unfolded state, the first display area of the folding screen displays the first interface; when the folding screen is in the folded state, the first screen displays the first interface. In the foregoing implementation (2), the display area corresponding to the first screen may be different from the first display area. In this way, the first interface displayed on the first display area when the folding screen is in the expanded state may have a different interface layout from the first interface displayed on the first screen when the folding screen is in the folded state.
本申请实施例中,如果第一屏对应的显示区域与第一显示区域不同;那么,随着折叠屏由展开状态向折叠状态转换,折叠屏显示的第一界面和第二界面的界面布局动态变化。具体的,响应于第一屏和第二屏的夹角逐渐变小,电子设备可显示第一界面由界面布局适配第一显示区域向界面布局适配第一屏动态变化的图像,直至第一屏和第二屏的夹角等于预设夹角阈值,电子设备在第一屏显示第一界面。其中,第一屏和第二屏的夹角大于预设夹角阈值时,电子设备在第一屏显示第一界面。In the embodiment of this application, if the display area corresponding to the first screen is different from the first display area; then, as the folding screen transitions from the expanded state to the folded state, the interface layout of the first interface and the second interface displayed on the folding screen is dynamic Variety. Specifically, in response to the angle between the first screen and the second screen gradually becoming smaller, the electronic device may display the first interface from the interface layout adapting to the first display area to the interface layout adapting to the dynamically changing image of the first screen until the first screen. The angle between the first screen and the second screen is equal to the preset angle threshold, and the electronic device displays the first interface on the first screen. Wherein, when the included angle between the first screen and the second screen is greater than the preset included angle threshold, the electronic device displays the first interface on the first screen.
以图7B中的(c)为例,随着折叠屏由展开状态向折叠状态转换,分割线C逐渐右移,使第一显示区域逐渐变小,第二显示区域逐渐变大。从而,第一显示区域上显示的第一界面(即第一内容)的界面布局适配第一显示区域的变化,第二显示区域上显示的第二界面的界面布局适配第二显示区域的变化。Taking (c) in FIG. 7B as an example, as the folding screen transitions from the unfolded state to the folded state, the dividing line C gradually moves to the right, making the first display area gradually smaller and the second display area gradually larger. Thus, the interface layout of the first interface (ie, the first content) displayed on the first display area adapts to the change of the first display area, and the interface layout of the second interface displayed on the second display area adapts to the change of the second display area. Variety.
需要注意的是,本申请实施例后续描述中,以第一显示区域和第二显示区域的分割线是折叠边,且折叠边的右侧为第一显示区域,折叠边的左侧为第二显示区域为例,对本申请实施例的方法进行说明。在这种情况下,第一显示区域对应图7C所示的第一屏701,第二显示区域对应图7C所示的第一屏702。It should be noted that in the subsequent description of the embodiments of the present application, the dividing line between the first display area and the second display area is the folding side, and the right side of the folding side is the first display area, and the left side of the folding side is the second The display area is taken as an example to describe the method of the embodiment of the present application. In this case, the first display area corresponds to the first screen 701 shown in FIG. 7C, and the second display area corresponds to the first screen 702 shown in FIG. 7C.
在一些实施例中,上述第一操作可以包括第一滑动操作和第二滑动操作。In some embodiments, the above-mentioned first operation may include a first sliding operation and a second sliding operation.
在该实施例的一种实现方式中,上述第一滑动操作可以是用户在折叠屏的第一屏输入的由左向右的滑动操作,第二滑动操作可以是用户在折叠屏的第二屏输入的由右向左的滑动操作。In an implementation of this embodiment, the above-mentioned first sliding operation may be a left-to-right sliding operation input by the user on the first screen of the folding screen, and the second sliding operation may be the user sliding on the second screen of the folding screen. The input sliding operation from right to left.
例如,以上述第一界面是图7C所示的“台风山竹”新闻界面703为例。上述第二滑动操作可以是用户(用户的一个手指,如左手拇指)在第二屏702中输入的滑动操作705a,第一滑动操作可以是用户(用户的另一个手指,如右手拇指)在第一屏701中输入的滑动操作705b。即上述第一操作可以包括滑动操作705a和滑动操作705b。For example, take the above-mentioned first interface as the "Typhoon Mangkhut" news interface 703 shown in FIG. 7C as an example. The above-mentioned second sliding operation may be a sliding operation 705a input by the user (one finger of the user, such as the thumb of the left hand) on the second screen 702, and the first sliding operation may be the user (the other finger of the user, such as the thumb of the right hand) in the second screen 702. A sliding operation 705b entered in a screen 701. That is, the above-mentioned first operation may include a sliding operation 705a and a sliding operation 705b.
在该实施例的另一种实现方式中,上述第一滑动操作可以是用户在折叠屏的第一屏输入的由右向左的弧形滑动操作,第二滑动操作可以是用户在折叠屏的第二屏输入的由左向右的弧形滑动操作。其中,上述弧形滑动操作的圆弧的半径大于预设半径阈值。例如,预设半径阈值可以为2厘米(cm)、2.5cm、3cm或3.5cm等。其中,该预设半径阈值可以是统计大量用户输入弧形滑动操作时的滑动轨迹的半径得到的,该预设半径阈值可以预先配置在电子设备100中。或者,该预设半径阈值可以由用户在电子设备中配置。In another implementation of this embodiment, the above-mentioned first sliding operation may be an arc-shaped sliding operation from right to left input by the user on the first screen of the folding screen, and the second sliding operation may be the user's sliding operation on the folding screen. The arc sliding operation from left to right input on the second screen. Wherein, the radius of the arc of the arc sliding operation is greater than the preset radius threshold. For example, the preset radius threshold may be 2 centimeters (cm), 2.5 cm, 3 cm, or 3.5 cm. The preset radius threshold may be obtained by counting the radius of the sliding track when a large number of users input an arc-shaped sliding operation, and the preset radius threshold may be pre-configured in the electronic device 100. Alternatively, the preset radius threshold may be configured by the user in the electronic device.
例如,以上述第一界面是图8A中的(a)所示的“台风山竹”新闻界面801为例。上述第二滑动操作可以是用户(用户的一个手指,如左手拇指)在图8A中的(a)所示的第二屏702中输入的弧形滑动操作802a,第一滑动操作可以是用户(用户的另一个手指,如右手拇指)在图8A中的(a)所示的第一屏701中输入的弧形滑动操作802b。即上述第一操作可以包括弧形滑动操作802a和弧形滑动操作802b。For example, take the above-mentioned first interface as the "Typhoon Mangkhut" news interface 801 shown in (a) in FIG. 8A as an example. The above-mentioned second sliding operation may be an arc-shaped sliding operation 802a input by the user (a finger of the user, such as a left thumb) on the second screen 702 shown in (a) in FIG. 8A, and the first sliding operation may be the user ( The user's other finger, such as the thumb of the right hand, inputs an arc-shaped sliding operation 802b on the first screen 701 shown in (a) of FIG. 8A. That is, the above-mentioned first operation may include an arc-shaped sliding operation 802a and an arc-shaped sliding operation 802b.
对于一些电子设备而言,假设电子设备当前显示界面a。例如,如图8B所示,响应于从电子设备的显示屏(包括折叠屏或非折叠屏)的左侧边缘或者右侧边缘划入的滑动操作806,这些电子设备可以显示界面b。界面b可以是界面a的上一层级的界面。或者,界面b可以是电子设备显示界面a之前所显示的前一个界面。其中,界面之间的层级关系的详细描述,可以参考本申请实施例后续相关介绍,本申请实施例这里不予赘述。本申请实施例中,将上述从电子设备的显示屏的左侧边缘或者右侧边缘划入的滑动操作称为back操作。For some electronic devices, it is assumed that the electronic device currently displays interface a. For example, as shown in FIG. 8B, in response to a sliding operation 806 swiped in from the left or right edge of the display screen (including folding screen or non-folding screen) of electronic devices, these electronic devices may display interface b. The interface b may be an interface higher than the interface a. Alternatively, the interface b may be the previous interface displayed before the electronic device displays the interface a. For a detailed description of the hierarchical relationship between interfaces, reference may be made to subsequent related introductions in the embodiments of the present application, and the embodiments of the present application will not be repeated here. In the embodiments of the present application, the aforementioned sliding operation drawn from the left edge or the right edge of the display screen of the electronic device is referred to as a back operation.
需要强调的是,为了区分上述第一操作与back操作,本申请实施例中的第一滑动操作和第二滑动操作可以是从折叠屏的非边缘区域开始的滑动操作。进一步的,在上述第一滑动操作和第二滑动操作是弧形滑动操作的情况下,为了区分第一操作与上述back操作,该弧形滑动操作对应的滑动轨迹的弧度与back操作对应的滑动轨迹不同。It should be emphasized that, in order to distinguish the foregoing first operation from the back operation, the first sliding operation and the second sliding operation in the embodiment of the present application may be sliding operations starting from a non-edge area of the folding screen. Further, in the case where the first sliding operation and the second sliding operation are arc sliding operations, in order to distinguish the first operation from the back operation, the arc of the sliding track corresponding to the arc sliding operation and the sliding corresponding to the back operation The trajectory is different.
在该实施例的另一种实现方式中,上述第一滑动操作可以是用户在第一屏输入的第一预设形状的滑动手势,第二滑动操作可以是用户在第二屏输入的第二预设形状的滑动手势。例如,该第一预设形状的滑动手势或第二预设形状的滑动手势可以为S形滑动手势、圆形或椭圆形滑动手势或者三角形滑动手势等。第一预设形状的滑动手势和第二预设形状的滑动手势可以相同也可以不同。In another implementation of this embodiment, the above-mentioned first sliding operation may be a first preset shape sliding gesture input by the user on the first screen, and the second sliding operation may be a second sliding gesture input by the user on the second screen. Swipe gestures with preset shapes. For example, the sliding gesture of the first preset shape or the sliding gesture of the second preset shape may be an S-shaped sliding gesture, a circular or elliptical sliding gesture, or a triangular sliding gesture. The sliding gesture of the first preset shape and the sliding gesture of the second preset shape may be the same or different.
在另一些实施例中,上述第一操作可以是用户在折叠屏输入的第三预设形状的滑动手势。进一步的,上述第一操作可以是用户在折叠屏的折叠边周围输入的第三预设形状的滑动手势,即该第一操作经过折叠屏的折叠边。例如,该第三预设形状的滑动手势可以为S形滑动手势、圆形或椭圆形滑动手势或者三角形滑动手势等。In other embodiments, the above-mentioned first operation may be a sliding gesture of the third preset shape input by the user on the folding screen. Further, the above-mentioned first operation may be a sliding gesture of a third preset shape input by the user around the folding edge of the folding screen, that is, the first operation passes through the folding edge of the folding screen. For example, the sliding gesture of the third preset shape may be an S-shaped sliding gesture, a circular or elliptical sliding gesture, or a triangular sliding gesture.
在另一些实施例中,上述第一操作可以是用户对折叠屏的第一预设折叠操作。例如,该第一预设折叠操作可以包括:第一屏与第二屏之间的夹角在预设夹角范围内由大变小;以及第一屏与第二屏之间的夹角在预设夹角范围内由小变大。即上述第一操作可以为:用户先控制第一屏与第二屏之间的夹角在预设夹角范围内由大变小,再控制第一屏与第二屏之间的夹 角在预设夹角范围内由小变大。例如,上述第一操作可以包括图9中的(a)所示的折叠操作902a和902b,以及图9中的(b)所示的折叠操作903a和903b。其中,折叠操作902a和902b用于控制第一屏与第二屏之间的夹角在预设夹角范围内由大变小。例如,第一屏与第二屏之间的夹角由图9中的(a)所示的α1变为图9中的(b)所示的α2,α1>α2。折叠操作903a和903b用于控制第一屏与第二屏之间的夹角在预设夹角范围内由小变大。例如,第一屏与第二屏之间的夹角由图9中的(b)所示的α2变为图9中的(c)所示的α3,α2<α3。其中,α1与α3可以相同,也可以不同。In other embodiments, the aforementioned first operation may be the user's first preset folding operation on the folding screen. For example, the first preset folding operation may include: the angle between the first screen and the second screen changes from large to small within the preset angle range; and the angle between the first screen and the second screen is The preset included angle range changes from small to large. That is, the above-mentioned first operation may be: the user first controls the angle between the first screen and the second screen to change from large to small within the preset angle range, and then controls the angle between the first screen and the second screen to be The preset included angle range changes from small to large. For example, the above-mentioned first operation may include folding operations 902a and 902b shown in (a) of FIG. 9 and folding operations 903a and 903b shown in (b) of FIG. 9. Among them, the folding operations 902a and 902b are used to control the angle between the first screen and the second screen from large to small within a preset angle range. For example, the angle between the first screen and the second screen changes from α1 shown in (a) of FIG. 9 to α2 shown in (b) of FIG. 9, where α1>α2. The folding operations 903a and 903b are used to control the angle between the first screen and the second screen from small to large within a preset angle range. For example, the angle between the first screen and the second screen is changed from α2 shown in (b) of FIG. 9 to α3 shown in (c) of FIG. 9, where α2<α3. Among them, α1 and α3 may be the same or different.
在上述应用场景(2)中,上述第一界面是第一应用的其他界面,该其他界面是第一应用的界面中除第一应用的首页之外的任一界面。结合上述应用场景(2),上述第二界面可以是第一应用的首页;或者,上述第二界面可以是第一界面的上一层级的界面。In the above application scenario (2), the above first interface is another interface of the first application, and the other interface is any interface of the first application except the home page of the first application. In combination with the above application scenario (2), the above second interface may be the home page of the first application; or, the above second interface may be an interface higher than the first interface.
在应用场景(2)的实现方式(一)中,上述第二界面可以是第一应用的首页。例如,以第一应用是“热点”应用为例。“热点”应用的首页是图5所示的界面501。响应于用户在图7C所示显示第一界面的折叠屏的第一操作,电子设备100可以显示图7D中的(a)所示的界面。如图7D中的(a)所示,电子设备100可以在折叠屏的第一显示区域(即第一屏701)显示第一界面703(与图7C所示的第一界面703的显示内容相同),在第二显示区域(即第二屏702)显示第二界面706(与图5所示的“热点”应用的首页的显示内容相同)。In the implementation (1) of the application scenario (2), the above-mentioned second interface may be the homepage of the first application. For example, take the first application being a "hot" application as an example. The home page of the “hot spot” application is the interface 501 shown in FIG. 5. In response to the user's first operation on the folding screen displaying the first interface shown in FIG. 7C, the electronic device 100 may display the interface shown in (a) in FIG. 7D. As shown in (a) in FIG. 7D, the electronic device 100 may display the first interface 703 (the same as the display content of the first interface 703 shown in FIG. 7C) in the first display area of the folding screen (ie, the first screen 701) ), the second interface 706 is displayed in the second display area (ie, the second screen 702) (the same as the display content of the home page of the "hotspot" application shown in FIG. 5).
在应用场景(2)的实现方式(二)中,上述第二界面可以是上述第一界面的上一层级的界面。In the implementation manner (2) of the application scenario (2), the second interface may be an interface higher than the first interface.
本申请实施例这里对不同界面之间的层级关系进行说明:The embodiment of the application here illustrates the hierarchical relationship between different interfaces:
本申请实施例中,同一应用的不同界面之间可以有上、下层级之分。电子设备100可以根据待显示界面与已显示界面之间的层级关系,在显示屏的显示区域内显示待显示界面。In the embodiments of the present application, different interfaces of the same application can be divided into upper and lower levels. The electronic device 100 can display the interface to be displayed in the display area of the display screen according to the hierarchical relationship between the interface to be displayed and the displayed interface.
例如,同一应用的不同界面可以对应相同的活动(Activity),也可以对应不同的Activity。当不同界面对应同一活动Activity时,这些界面可以对应同一层级。当不同界面对应不同的活动Activity时,这些界面对应不同的层级。响应于用户在一个界面上的操作,该界面可以调用另一个界面。当主动调用的界面与被调用界面对应相同的Activity时,主动调用的界面与被调用界面可以对应相同的层级;当主动调用的界面与被调用界面对应不同的Activity时,被调用的界面为主动调用的界面的下一个层级。For example, different interfaces of the same application may correspond to the same activity (Activity), or may correspond to different activities. When different interfaces correspond to the same activity, these interfaces can correspond to the same level. When different interfaces correspond to different activity activities, these interfaces correspond to different levels. In response to a user's operation on one interface, the interface can call another interface. When the actively called interface corresponds to the same activity as the called interface, the actively called interface and the called interface can correspond to the same level; when the actively called interface corresponds to a different activity from the called interface, the called interface is active The next level of the called interface.
示例性的,主动调用的界面可以为图5中的界面501,被调用的界面可以为图7C中的界面703,界面703与界面501对应不同的Activity,界面703为界面501下一层级的界面,界面501为界面703上一层级的界面。Exemplarily, the actively called interface may be the interface 501 in FIG. 5, the called interface may be the interface 703 in FIG. 7C, the interface 703 and the interface 501 correspond to different activities, and the interface 703 is the next level interface of the interface 501 , The interface 501 is an interface one level above the interface 703.
在一种技术方案中,电子设备100对界面间的调用的过程可以通过先进后出的栈来实现。举例来说,当电子设备100调用并显示界面1时,该界面1入栈;当界面1调用界面2时,界面2入栈;当用户从当前的界面2返回界面1时,当前界面2出栈。此外,当电子设备100检测到用户在当前界面上的返回操作(例如用户对图7C所示的“返回”按钮的操作)时,响应于该操作,返回之前主动调用当前界面的界面。In a technical solution, the process of the electronic device 100 calling between interfaces can be implemented through a first-in-last-out stack. For example, when the electronic device 100 calls and displays interface 1, interface 1 is pushed into the stack; when interface 1 calls interface 2, interface 2 is pushed into the stack; when the user returns from the current interface 2 to interface 1, the current interface 2 is out Stack. In addition, when the electronic device 100 detects a user's return operation on the current interface (for example, the user's operation on the "return" button shown in FIG. 7C), in response to this operation, it returns to the interface that previously actively called the current interface.
再例如,电子设备100上预设有不同Activity之间的层级关系,层级高的Activity对应的界面的层级也高,层级低的Activity对应的界面的层级也低。例如,“头条”应用中,关注、推荐、热点、视频、头条号的资讯列表界面对应的Activity的层级,高于资讯详细页面(该详细页面是一个界面)对应的Activity的层级;关注、推荐、热点、视频、头条号的资讯列表界面的层级,也高于资讯详细页面的层级。For another example, the electronic device 100 is preset with a hierarchical relationship between different activities. The level of the interface corresponding to the activity with a higher level is also higher, and the level of the interface corresponding to the activity with a lower level is also lower. For example, in the "Toutiao" application, the level of Activity corresponding to the information list interface of Follow, Recommendation, Hotspot, Video, and Toutiao Number is higher than the level of Activity corresponding to the information detail page (the detail page is an interface); follow, recommend The level of the information list interface of, hotspots, videos, and headlines is also higher than the level of the detailed information page.
基于界面间的层级关系,图5所示的界面501是图7C所示的第一界面703、图8A中的 (a)所示的第一界面或者图9中的(a)所示的第一界面901的上一层级界面。Based on the hierarchical relationship between the interfaces, the interface 501 shown in FIG. 5 is the first interface 703 shown in FIG. 7C, the first interface shown in (a) in FIG. 8A, or the first interface shown in (a) in FIG. An interface 901 is the upper level interface.
例如,响应于用户在图7C所示显示第一界面的折叠屏的第一操作(如滑动操作705a和滑动操作705b),电子设备100可以显示图7D中的(a)所示的界面。如图7D中的(a)所示,电子设备100可以在折叠屏的第一显示区域(即第一屏701)显示第一界面703(与图7C所示的第一界面703的显示内容相同),在第二显示区域(即第二屏702)显示第二界面706。其中,第二界面706与图5所示的界面501的显示内容相同,均为图7C所示的第一界面703的上一层级界面。For example, in response to the user's first operation (such as sliding operation 705a and sliding operation 705b) on the folding screen displaying the first interface shown in FIG. 7C, the electronic device 100 may display the interface shown in (a) in FIG. 7D. As shown in (a) in FIG. 7D, the electronic device 100 may display the first interface 703 (the same as the display content of the first interface 703 shown in FIG. 7C) in the first display area of the folding screen (ie, the first screen 701) ), the second interface 706 is displayed in the second display area (ie, the second screen 702). Wherein, the display content of the second interface 706 is the same as that of the interface 501 shown in FIG. 5, and both are the upper level interface of the first interface 703 shown in FIG. 7C.
又例如,响应于用户在图8A中的(a)所示显示第一界面的折叠屏的第一操作(如弧形滑动操作802a和弧形滑动操作802b),电子设备100可以显示图8A中的(b)所示的界面。如图8A中的(b)所示,电子设备100可以在折叠屏的第一显示区域(即第一屏701)显示第一界面的第一内容801,在第二显示区域(即第二屏702)显示第二界面803。其中,第二界面803与图5所示的界面501的显示内容相同,均为图8A中的(a)所示的第一界面801的上一层级界面。For another example, in response to the user's first operation (such as arc-shaped sliding operation 802a and arc-shaped sliding operation 802b) of the folding screen displaying the first interface as shown in (a) of FIG. 8A, the electronic device 100 may display The interface shown in (b). As shown in (b) of FIG. 8A, the electronic device 100 can display the first content 801 of the first interface in the first display area (ie, the first screen 701) of the folding screen, and in the second display area (ie, the second screen) 702) The second interface 803 is displayed. Wherein, the display content of the second interface 803 is the same as that of the interface 501 shown in FIG. 5, and both are the upper level interface of the first interface 801 shown in (a) in FIG. 8A.
再例如,响应于用户在图9中的(a)和图9中的(b)所示显示第一界面的折叠屏的第一操作(如图9中的(a)所示的折叠操作902a和902b,以及图9中的(b)所示的折叠操作903a和903b),电子设备100可以显示9中的(c)所示的界面。如图9中的(c)所示,电子设备100可以在折叠屏的第一显示区域显示第一界面的第一内容904,在第二显示区域显示第二界面905。其中,第二界面905与图5所示的界面501的显示内容相同,均为图9中的(b)所示的第一界面904的上一层级界面。For another example, in response to the user's first operation of the folding screen displaying the first interface as shown in FIG. 9(a) and FIG. 9(b) (the folding operation 902a shown in FIG. 9(a)) And 902b, and the folding operations 903a and 903b shown in (b) of FIG. 9), the electronic device 100 can display the interface shown in (c) of 9. As shown in (c) of FIG. 9, the electronic device 100 may display the first content 904 of the first interface in the first display area of the folding screen, and display the second interface 905 in the second display area. Wherein, the display content of the second interface 905 is the same as that of the interface 501 shown in FIG. 5, and both are the upper level interface of the first interface 904 shown in (b) of FIG. 9.
在应用场景(2)的实现方式(三)中,上述第二界面可以是第一应用的活动记录中,第一界面对应的活动项的前一个活动项对应的界面。In the implementation manner (3) of the application scenario (2), the above-mentioned second interface may be an interface corresponding to the previous activity item of the activity item corresponding to the first interface in the activity record of the first application.
一般而言,电子设备100响应于用户对电子设备100的主界面(即桌面)中的第一应用的图标的点击操作,显示第一应用的首页后,便可以生成该第一应用的活动记录(Activity record),并在该活动记录中保存针对首页的记录项。响应于用户在第一应用的首页或者任一界面的操作,电子设备100显示该第一应用的另一界面时,便可以在该第一应用的活动记录中保存该另一界面的记录项。其中,电子设备100可以通过先进后出的栈(称为活动记录栈),来记录各个应用的活动记录。第一应用的活动记录栈的指针指向栈顶的记录项,电子设备100显示第一应用的界面时,显示指针指向的记录项所对应的界面。Generally speaking, the electronic device 100 responds to the user's click operation on the icon of the first application in the main interface (ie desktop) of the electronic device 100, and after displaying the home page of the first application, the activity record of the first application can be generated (Activity record), and save the record items for the homepage in the activity record. In response to the user's operation on the home page or any interface of the first application, when the electronic device 100 displays another interface of the first application, it can save the record items of the other interface in the activity record of the first application. Among them, the electronic device 100 can record the activity record of each application through a first-in-last-out stack (referred to as an activity record stack). The pointer of the activity record stack of the first application points to the record item at the top of the stack, and when the electronic device 100 displays the interface of the first application, the interface corresponding to the record item pointed to by the pointer is displayed.
例如,电子设备100响应于用户对电子设备100的主界面(即桌面)中的第一应用的图标的点击操作,显示第一应用的首页后,电子设备100便可以生成图8C中的(a)所示的活动记录栈。其中,图8C中的(a)所示的活动记录栈中包括界面1(即第一应用的首页)的记录项,且指针指向界面1的记录项。For example, the electronic device 100 responds to the user's click operation on the icon of the first application in the main interface (ie desktop) of the electronic device 100, and displays the home page of the first application, the electronic device 100 can generate (a) in FIG. 8C ) Shows the activity record stack. Wherein, the activity record stack shown in (a) in FIG. 8C includes record items of interface 1 (that is, the home page of the first application), and the pointer points to the record items of interface 1.
响应于用户在界面1中的操作,电子设备100可显示界面2,并在活动记录栈中压入界面2对应的记录项,得到图8C中的(b)所示的活动记录栈。其中,图8C中的(b)所示的活动记录栈中,指针指向界面2的记录项。In response to the user's operation in the interface 1, the electronic device 100 can display the interface 2, and press the record item corresponding to the interface 2 in the activity record stack to obtain the activity record stack shown in (b) in FIG. 8C. Among them, in the activity record stack shown in (b) of FIG. 8C, the pointer points to the record item of the interface 2.
响应于用户在界面2输入的返回操作(如用户对“返回”按钮的点击操作),电子设备100可显示界面1,并在活动记录栈中压入界面1对应的记录项,得到图8C中的(c)所示的活动记录栈。图8C中的(c)所示的活动记录栈中,指针指向位于栈顶的界面1的记录项。In response to a return operation input by the user on the interface 2 (such as the user's click operation on the "return" button), the electronic device 100 may display interface 1, and press the record item corresponding to interface 1 in the activity record stack to obtain the result in FIG. 8C The activity record stack shown in (c). In the activity record stack shown in (c) in FIG. 8C, the pointer points to the record item of interface 1 at the top of the stack.
响应于用户在界面1中的操作,电子设备100可显示界面3,并在活动记录栈中压入界面3对应的记录项,得到图8C中的(d)所示的活动记录栈。图8C中的(d)所示的活动记录栈中,指针指向位于栈顶的界面3的记录项。In response to the user's operation in the interface 1, the electronic device 100 may display the interface 3, and press the record item corresponding to the interface 3 in the activity record stack to obtain the activity record stack shown in (d) in FIG. 8C. In the activity record stack shown in (d) in FIG. 8C, the pointer points to the record item of interface 3 at the top of the stack.
响应于用户在界面3中的操作,电子设备100可显示界面4,并在活动记录栈中压入界面4对应的记录项,得到图8C中的(e)所示的活动记录栈。图8C中的(e)所示的活动记录栈中,指针指向位于栈顶的界面4的记录项。In response to the user's operation in the interface 3, the electronic device 100 may display the interface 4, and press the record item corresponding to the interface 4 into the activity record stack to obtain the activity record stack shown in (e) in FIG. 8C. In the activity record stack shown in (e) in FIG. 8C, the pointer points to the record item of the interface 4 at the top of the stack.
结合上述实例,响应于上述第一操作,电子设备100可将第一应用的活动记录栈的栈顶指针向下移动,使得指针指向栈顶的下一个记录项。此时,指针指向的记录项对应的界面是第二界面,栈顶的记录项是第一界面。示例性的,上述活动记录栈的活动项中可以保存对应界面的标识。In combination with the foregoing example, in response to the foregoing first operation, the electronic device 100 may move the stack top pointer of the activity record stack of the first application downward so that the pointer points to the next record item on the top of the stack. At this time, the interface corresponding to the record item pointed to by the pointer is the second interface, and the record item at the top of the stack is the first interface. Exemplarily, the identification of the corresponding interface may be stored in the activity item of the above activity record stack.
在上述应用场景(1)的情况(1)中,上述第一界面是第一应用的首页,并且,电子设备100在第一应用的活动记录中仅保存了第一应用的首页的活动项。例如,如图8C中的(a)所示,活动记录栈中仅包括界面1的活动项。在这种情况下,响应于第一操作,电子设备100无法从第一应用的活动记录中查找到除第一界面之外的其他界面的活动项。In the case (1) of the above application scenario (1), the above first interface is the home page of the first application, and the electronic device 100 only saves the activity items of the home page of the first application in the activity record of the first application. For example, as shown in (a) in FIG. 8C, only the activity items of interface 1 are included in the activity record stack. In this case, in response to the first operation, the electronic device 100 cannot find activity items on other interfaces except the first interface from the activity record of the first application.
基于此,在情况(1)的一种实现方式中,响应于上述第一操作,电子设备100可以显示第一提示信息,该第一提示信息用于提示电子设备100当前不能多窗口显示第一应用的多个界面。例如,以第一界面是图5所示的“热点”应用的首页为例。其中,电子设备100在上述情况(1)下,显示图5所示的“热点”应用的首页。响应于用户在图5所示显示第一界面的折叠屏的第一操作,电子设备100可以显示图8D所示的第一提示信息805。第一提示信息805用于提示电子设备100当前不能双窗口显示。Based on this, in an implementation manner of case (1), in response to the above-mentioned first operation, the electronic device 100 may display first prompt information, which is used to prompt that the electronic device 100 cannot currently display the first in multiple windows. Multiple interfaces of the application. For example, take the first interface as the homepage of the "hotspot" application shown in FIG. 5 as an example. Wherein, the electronic device 100 displays the home page of the "hot spot" application shown in FIG. 5 in the above situation (1). In response to the user's first operation on the folding screen displaying the first interface shown in FIG. 5, the electronic device 100 may display the first prompt information 805 shown in FIG. 8D. The first prompt message 805 is used to prompt that the electronic device 100 cannot currently display in dual windows.
在情况(1)的另一种实现方式中,电子设备100可以显示上述第一界面(即第一应用的首页)的下一层级的任一界面。即第二界面可以是第一应用的首页的下一层级的任一界面。In another implementation manner of case (1), the electronic device 100 may display any interface of the next level of the above-mentioned first interface (that is, the home page of the first application). That is, the second interface can be any interface on the next level of the home page of the first application.
在情况(1)的另一种实现方式中,电子设备100中可以预先设置在上述情况(1)中,响应于第一操作,电子设备100所要显示的第二界面。该第二界面可以是第一应用的界面中,除首页之外的任一界面。特别的,上述第二界面可以与第一界面相同。即第二界面也可以是第一应用的首页。In another implementation manner of the case (1), the electronic device 100 may be preset in the above case (1), and in response to the first operation, the second interface to be displayed by the electronic device 100 is to be displayed. The second interface may be any interface other than the homepage in the interface of the first application. In particular, the above-mentioned second interface may be the same as the first interface. That is, the second interface can also be the homepage of the first application.
在上述应用场景(1)的情况(2)中,虽然第一界面是第一应用的首页,但是电子设备100在第一应用的活动记录中保存了第一应用的其他界面的活动项。在这种情况下,上述第二界面可以是第一应用的活动记录中,第一界面对应的活动项的前一个活动项对应的界面。电子设备100确定第二界面的具体方法可以参考应用场景(2)的实现方式(三)中的详细描述,本申请实施例这里不予赘述。In the situation (2) of the above application scenario (1), although the first interface is the home page of the first application, the electronic device 100 saves the activity items of other interfaces of the first application in the activity record of the first application. In this case, the aforementioned second interface may be an interface corresponding to the previous activity item of the activity item corresponding to the first interface in the activity record of the first application. For the specific method for the electronic device 100 to determine the second interface, refer to the detailed description in the implementation mode (3) of the application scenario (2), which is not repeated in the embodiment of the present application.
本申请实施例中,响应于用户的第一操作,电子设备100可以将折叠屏的窗口模式由单窗口模式切换为双窗口模式,折叠屏以双窗口显示第一应用的第一界面的第一内容和第二界面,即折叠屏在两个显示区域同时显示第一应用的两个界面。这样,折叠屏便可以向用户呈现第一应用的更多显示内容,可以增大折叠屏在同一时间显示的信息量,提升折叠屏的显示区域的利用率。In the embodiment of the present application, in response to the user's first operation, the electronic device 100 can switch the window mode of the folding screen from the single window mode to the dual window mode, and the folding screen displays the first interface of the first application in dual windows. The content and the second interface, that is, the folding screen, simultaneously displays the two interfaces of the first application in the two display areas. In this way, the folding screen can present more display content of the first application to the user, can increase the amount of information displayed on the folding screen at the same time, and improve the utilization of the display area of the folding screen.
进一步的,如图7A所示,在S703之后,本申请实施例的方法还可以包括S704-S705。Further, as shown in FIG. 7A, after S703, the method of the embodiment of the present application may further include S704-S705.
S704:电子设备100接收用户在折叠屏的第二操作,该第一操作用于触发折叠屏以单窗口显示第一应用的一个界面。S704: The electronic device 100 receives a second operation of the user on the folding screen, and the first operation is used to trigger the folding screen to display an interface of the first application in a single window.
S705:响应于第二操作,电子设备100在折叠屏显示第一应用的第一界面。S705: In response to the second operation, the electronic device 100 displays the first interface of the first application on the folding screen.
其中,S705中,电子设备在折叠屏不显示第一应用的第二界面。Among them, in S705, the electronic device does not display the second interface of the first application on the folding screen.
在另一实施例中,作为步骤S705的替换步骤,在步骤S704之后,本申请实施例的方法还可以包括S705A。In another embodiment, as an alternative to step S705, after step S704, the method of the embodiment of the present application may further include S705A.
S705A:响应于第二操作,电子设备100在折叠屏显示第二界面的第二内容。S705A: In response to the second operation, the electronic device 100 displays the second content of the second interface on the folding screen.
其中,第二内容可以是第二界面的全部内容,也可以是第二界面的部分内容。本申请实施例的附图中,以第二内容是第二界面的全部内容为例进行说明。其中,S705A中,电子设备在折叠屏不显示第一应用的第一界面。Wherein, the second content may be the entire content of the second interface or part of the content of the second interface. In the drawings of the embodiments of the present application, the second content is the entire content of the second interface as an example for description. Among them, in S705A, the electronic device does not display the first interface of the first application on the folding screen.
其中,本申请实施例中,以电子设备100响应于第二操作,显示第一应用的第一界面为例,对本申请实施例的方法进行说明。Among them, in the embodiment of the present application, the electronic device 100 displays the first interface of the first application in response to the second operation as an example to describe the method of the embodiment of the present application.
在一些实施例中,电子设备100在折叠屏显示第一应用的第一界面,具体可以为:电子设备100在折叠屏的第一屏和第二屏,显示第一界面,不显示其他界面(如第二界面)。例如,图7D中的(b)所示的折叠屏沿着折叠边可以分为第一屏701和第二屏702。图7D中的(b)所示的电子设备100可以在折叠屏的第一屏701和第二屏702,显示第一界面703。In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 displays the first interface of the first application on the folding screen, which may specifically be: the electronic device 100 displays the first interface on the first and second screens of the folding screen, but does not display other interfaces ( Such as the second interface). For example, the folding screen shown in (b) of FIG. 7D can be divided into a first screen 701 and a second screen 702 along the folding edge. The electronic device 100 shown in (b) of FIG. 7D may display the first interface 703 on the first screen 701 and the second screen 702 of the folding screen.
在另一些实施例中,电子设备100可以采用图4中的(a)或图4中的(b)所示的方式显示第一界面或第二界面。本申请实施例中,对电子设备100显示第一界面或第二界面的具体方式不作限制。In other embodiments, the electronic device 100 may display the first interface or the second interface in the manner shown in FIG. 4(a) or FIG. 4(b). In the embodiment of the present application, the specific manner in which the electronic device 100 displays the first interface or the second interface is not limited.
其中,第二操作与上述第一操作不同。在一些实施例中,上述第二操作可以包括第三滑动操作和第四滑动操作。Among them, the second operation is different from the above-mentioned first operation. In some embodiments, the aforementioned second operation may include a third sliding operation and a fourth sliding operation.
在该实施例的一种实现方式中,上述第三滑动操作可以是用户在折叠屏的第一屏输入的由右向左的滑动操作,第四滑动操作可以是用户在折叠屏的第二屏输入的由左向右的滑动操作。In an implementation of this embodiment, the above-mentioned third sliding operation may be a right-to-left sliding operation input by the user on the first screen of the folding screen, and the fourth sliding operation may be a user sliding on the second screen of the folding screen. The input sliding operation from left to right.
例如,第四滑动操作可以是用户(用户的一个手指,如左手拇指)在图7D中的(a)所示的第二屏702中输入的滑动操作707a,第三滑动操作可以是用户(用户的另一个手指,如右手拇指)在图7D中的(a)所示的第一屏701中输入的滑动操作707b。即上述第二操作可以包括滑动操作707a和滑动操作707b。响应于用户在图7D中的(a)所示的界面的滑动操作707a和滑动操作707b,电子设备100可以显示图7D中的(b)所示的第一界面703。For example, the fourth sliding operation may be the sliding operation 707a input by the user (the user's finger, such as the left thumb) on the second screen 702 shown in (a) in FIG. 7D, and the third sliding operation may be the user (user The other finger, such as the thumb of the right hand, enters the sliding operation 707b in the first screen 701 shown in (a) of FIG. 7D. That is, the above-mentioned second operation may include a sliding operation 707a and a sliding operation 707b. In response to the user's sliding operation 707a and sliding operation 707b on the interface shown in (a) in FIG. 7D, the electronic device 100 may display the first interface 703 shown in (b) in FIG. 7D.
在该实施例的另一种实现方式中,上述第三滑动操作可以是用户在折叠屏的第一屏输入的由左向右的弧形滑动操作,第四滑动操作可以是用户在折叠屏的第二屏输入的由右向左的弧形滑动操作。其中,上述弧形滑动操作的圆弧的半径大于上述预设半径阈值。In another implementation of this embodiment, the aforementioned third sliding operation may be an arc-shaped sliding operation from left to right input by the user on the first screen of the folding screen, and the fourth sliding operation may be the user's sliding operation on the folding screen. The arc sliding operation from right to left input on the second screen. Wherein, the radius of the arc of the arc sliding operation is greater than the preset radius threshold.
例如,第四滑动操作可以是用户(用户的一个手指,如左手拇指)在图8A中的(b)所示的第二屏702中输入的弧形滑动操作804a,第三滑动操作可以是用户(用户的另一个手指,如右手拇指)在图8A中的(b)第一屏701中输入的弧形滑动操作804b。即上述第二操作可以包括弧形滑动操作804a和弧形滑动操作804b。响应于用户在图8A中的(b)所示的界面的弧形滑动操作804a和弧形滑动操作804b,电子设备100可以显示图7D中的(b)所示的第一界面703。For example, the fourth sliding operation may be an arc-shaped sliding operation 804a input by the user (a finger of the user, such as a left thumb) on the second screen 702 shown in (b) of FIG. 8A, and the third sliding operation may be the user (The user's other finger, such as the thumb of the right hand) an arc-shaped sliding operation 804b entered in (b) the first screen 701 in FIG. 8A. That is, the aforementioned second operation may include an arc-shaped sliding operation 804a and an arc-shaped sliding operation 804b. In response to the arc-shaped sliding operation 804a and the arc-shaped sliding operation 804b of the user on the interface shown in (b) of FIG. 8A, the electronic device 100 may display the first interface 703 shown in (b) of FIG. 7D.
需要强调的是,为了区分第二操作与上述back操作,本申请实施例中的第三滑动操作和第四滑动操作可以是从折叠屏的非边缘区域开始的滑动操作。It should be emphasized that, in order to distinguish the second operation from the above-mentioned back operation, the third sliding operation and the fourth sliding operation in the embodiment of the present application may be sliding operations starting from a non-edge area of the folding screen.
可选的,在另一些实施例中,第一操作可以为滑动操作707a和滑动操作707b,或者弧形滑动操作804a和弧形滑动操作804b;第二操作可以为滑动操作705a和滑动操作705b,或者弧形滑动操作802a和弧形滑动操作802b。Optionally, in other embodiments, the first operation may be sliding operation 707a and sliding operation 707b, or arc sliding operation 804a and arc sliding operation 804b; the second operation may be sliding operation 705a and sliding operation 705b, Or the arc sliding operation 802a and the arc sliding operation 802b.
在该实施例的另一种实现方式中,上述第三滑动操作可以是用户在第一屏输入的第四预设形状的滑动手势,第四滑动操作可以是用户在第二屏输入的第五预设形状的滑动手势。例如,该第四预设形状的滑动手势或第五预设形状的滑动手势可以为S形滑动手势、圆形或椭圆形滑动手势或者三角形滑动手势等。第四预设形状的滑动手势和第五预设形状的滑动手势可以相同也可以不同。但是,第三滑动操作和第四滑动操作组合成的第二操作,与上述第一 滑动操作和第二滑动操作组合成的第一操作不同。In another implementation of this embodiment, the above-mentioned third sliding operation may be a sliding gesture with a fourth preset shape input by the user on the first screen, and the fourth sliding operation may be a fifth sliding operation input by the user on the second screen. Swipe gestures with preset shapes. For example, the sliding gesture of the fourth preset shape or the sliding gesture of the fifth preset shape may be an S-shaped sliding gesture, a circular or elliptical sliding gesture, or a triangular sliding gesture. The sliding gesture of the fourth preset shape and the sliding gesture of the fifth preset shape may be the same or different. However, the second operation formed by the combination of the third sliding operation and the fourth sliding operation is different from the first operation formed by the combination of the first sliding operation and the second sliding operation described above.
在另一些实施例中,上述第二操作可以是用户在折叠屏输入的第六预设形状的滑动手势。进一步的,上述第二操作可以是用户在折叠屏的折叠边周围输入的第六预设形状的滑动手势,即该第一操作经过折叠屏的折叠边。例如,该第六预设形状的滑动手势可以为S形滑动手势、圆形或椭圆形滑动手势或者三角形滑动手势等。第六预设形状与上述第三预设形状不同。In other embodiments, the above-mentioned second operation may be a sliding gesture of the sixth preset shape input by the user on the folding screen. Further, the above-mentioned second operation may be a sliding gesture of a sixth preset shape input by the user around the folding edge of the folding screen, that is, the first operation passes through the folding edge of the folding screen. For example, the sliding gesture of the sixth preset shape may be an S-shaped sliding gesture, a circular or elliptical sliding gesture, or a triangular sliding gesture. The sixth preset shape is different from the third preset shape described above.
在另一些实施例中,上述第二操作可以是用户对折叠屏的第二预设折叠操作。例如,该第二预设折叠操作可以包括:第一屏与第二屏之间的夹角在预设夹角范围内由小变大;以及第一屏与第二屏之间的夹角在预设夹角范围内由大变小。即上述第一操作可以为:用户先控制第一屏与第二屏之间的夹角在预设夹角范围内由小变大,再控制第一屏与第二屏之间的夹角在预设夹角范围内由大变小。In other embodiments, the above-mentioned second operation may be a second preset folding operation of the user on the folding screen. For example, the second preset folding operation may include: the angle between the first screen and the second screen changes from small to larger within the preset angle range; and the angle between the first screen and the second screen is The range of the preset included angle changes from large to small. That is, the above-mentioned first operation can be: the user first controls the angle between the first screen and the second screen to change from small to large within the preset angle range, and then controls the angle between the first screen and the second screen to be The range of the preset included angle changes from large to small.
可选的,在另一些实施例中,上述第一预设折叠操作(即第一操作)可以包括:第一屏与第二屏之间的夹角在预设夹角范围内由小变大;以及第一屏与第二屏之间的夹角在预设夹角范围内由大变小。即上述第一操作可以为:用户先控制第一屏与第二屏之间的夹角在预设夹角范围内由小变大,再控制第一屏与第二屏之间的夹角在预设夹角范围内由大变小。而第二预设折叠操作(即第二操作)可以包括:第一屏与第二屏之间的夹角在预设夹角范围内由大变小;以及第一屏与第二屏之间的夹角在预设夹角范围内由小变大。即上述第一操作可以为:用户先控制第一屏与第二屏之间的夹角在预设夹角范围内由大变小,再控制第一屏与第二屏之间的夹角在预设夹角范围内由小变大。Optionally, in other embodiments, the above-mentioned first preset folding operation (ie, the first operation) may include: the angle between the first screen and the second screen changes from small to large within the preset angle range ; And the angle between the first screen and the second screen changes from large to small within the preset angle range. That is, the above-mentioned first operation can be: the user first controls the angle between the first screen and the second screen to change from small to large within the preset angle range, and then controls the angle between the first screen and the second screen to be The range of the preset included angle changes from large to small. The second preset folding operation (ie, the second operation) may include: the angle between the first screen and the second screen changes from large to small within the preset angle; and between the first screen and the second screen The included angle of is changed from small to large within the preset angle range. That is, the above-mentioned first operation may be: the user first controls the angle between the first screen and the second screen to change from large to small within the preset angle range, and then controls the angle between the first screen and the second screen to be The preset included angle range changes from small to large.
可选的,在第一操作是第一预设折叠操作,第二操作是第二预设折叠屏操作的情况下,第一操作与第二操作可以相同,即第一预设折叠操作与第二预设折叠操作相同。例如,上述第一预设折叠操作和第二预设操作均可以为:用户先控制第一屏与第二屏之间的夹角在预设夹角范围内由小变大,再控制第一屏与第二屏之间的夹角在预设夹角范围内由大变小。又例如,第一预设折叠操作和第二预设操作均可以为:用户先控制第一屏与第二屏之间的夹角在预设夹角范围内由大变小,再控制第一屏与第二屏之间的夹角在预设夹角范围内由小变大。其中,当电子设备100在折叠屏单窗口显示第一界面时,响应于上述第一预设折叠操作(即第二预设折叠操作),电子设备100可以以双窗口显示第一界面的第一内容和第二界面。当电子设备100可以以双窗口显示第一界面的第一内容和第二界面时,响应于上述第二预设折叠操作(即第一预设折叠操作),电子设备100可以以单窗口显示第一界面或第二界面的第二内容。Optionally, when the first operation is a first preset folding operation and the second operation is a second preset folding screen operation, the first operation and the second operation may be the same, that is, the first preset folding operation is the same as the second operation. The two preset folding operations are the same. For example, both the first preset folding operation and the second preset operation may be: the user first controls the angle between the first screen and the second screen to change from small to large within the preset angle, and then controls the first The angle between the screen and the second screen changes from large to small within the preset angle range. For another example, both the first preset folding operation and the second preset operation may be: the user first controls the angle between the first screen and the second screen from large to small within the preset angle, and then controls the first The angle between the screen and the second screen changes from small to large within the preset angle range. Wherein, when the electronic device 100 displays the first interface in a single window of the folding screen, in response to the aforementioned first preset folding operation (ie, the second preset folding operation), the electronic device 100 may display the first interface of the first interface in dual windows. Content and second interface. When the electronic device 100 can display the first content and the second interface of the first interface in dual windows, in response to the aforementioned second preset folding operation (that is, the first preset folding operation), the electronic device 100 can display the first content in a single window. The second content of an interface or a second interface.
在另一些实施例中,上述第二操作可以是用户对第一显示区域和第二显示区域的分割线的向左拖动操作或向右拖动操作。例如,如图10所示,折叠屏的第一显示区域1003和第二显示区域1004的分割线为1001。In other embodiments, the above-mentioned second operation may be a left drag operation or a right drag operation on the dividing line of the first display area and the second display area by the user. For example, as shown in FIG. 10, the dividing line of the first display area 1003 and the second display area 1004 of the folding screen is 1001.
假设分割线的右侧为第一显示区域,分割线的左侧为第二显示区域,且电子设备100在第一显示区域显示第一界面的第一内容,在第二显示区域显示第二界面。那么,响应于用户对上述分割线的向左拖动操作,电子设备100可以以单窗口显示第一界面。响应于用户对上述分割线的向右拖动操作,电子设备100可以以单窗口显示第二界面。例如,响应于用户对图10所示的分割线的向左拖动操作,电子设备100可以显示图9中的(a)所示的第一界面。响应于用户对图10所示的分割线的向右拖动操作,电子设备100可以显示图5所示的第二界面。Assume that the right side of the dividing line is the first display area, and the left side of the dividing line is the second display area, and the electronic device 100 displays the first content of the first interface in the first display area, and displays the second interface in the second display area . Then, in response to the user's drag operation of the aforementioned dividing line to the left, the electronic device 100 may display the first interface in a single window. In response to the user's rightward drag operation of the aforementioned dividing line, the electronic device 100 may display the second interface in a single window. For example, in response to the user's drag operation of the dividing line shown in FIG. 10 to the left, the electronic device 100 may display the first interface shown in (a) of FIG. 9. In response to the user's rightward drag operation of the dividing line shown in FIG. 10, the electronic device 100 may display the second interface shown in FIG.
示例性的,上述向左拖动操作可以是从上述分割线开始,向左拖动的距离大于预设距离的拖动操作。上述向右拖动操作可以是从上述分割线开始,向右拖动的距离大于预设距离的 拖动操作。例如,该预设距离可以为1cm、2cm或者1.5cm等。或者,上述向左拖动操作可以是从上述分割线开始,向左拖动至折叠屏的左侧边框的拖动操作。上述向右拖动操作可以是从上述分割线开始,向右拖动至折叠屏的右侧边框的拖动操作。Exemplarily, the aforementioned dragging operation to the left may be a drag operation starting from the aforementioned dividing line and dragging to the left for a distance greater than a preset distance. The aforementioned dragging operation to the right may be a drag operation starting from the aforementioned dividing line and dragging to the right for a distance greater than a preset distance. For example, the preset distance can be 1 cm, 2 cm, or 1.5 cm. Alternatively, the aforementioned dragging operation to the left may be a drag operation starting from the aforementioned dividing line and dragging to the left to the left border of the folding screen. The aforementioned dragging operation to the right may be a drag operation starting from the aforementioned dividing line and dragging to the right to the right border of the folding screen.
可以理解,用户对上述分割线执行向左拖动操作或右拖动操作之前,用户的手指会接触分割线。可选的,响应于用户手指接触分割线,电子设备100可以在该分割线上显示方向性拖动标识。例如,如图10所示,响应于用户手指接触分割线,电子设备100可以在该分割线上显示方向性拖动标识1002。It can be understood that before the user performs a left drag operation or a right drag operation on the aforementioned dividing line, the user's finger will touch the dividing line. Optionally, in response to the user's finger touching the dividing line, the electronic device 100 may display a directional drag indicator on the dividing line. For example, as shown in FIG. 10, in response to the user's finger touching the dividing line, the electronic device 100 may display a directional drag indicator 1002 on the dividing line.
可选的,响应于用户手指接触分割线,电子设备100还可以显示第二提示信息。该第二提示信息用于提示用户向左或向右拖动分割线,可控制电子设备以单窗口显示。例如,如图10所示,响应于用户手指接触分割线,电子设备100可以显示第二提示信息1005。第二提示信息1005可以为“按住向左或向右拖动,控制手机以单窗口显示!”。Optionally, in response to the user's finger touching the dividing line, the electronic device 100 may also display second prompt information. The second prompt information is used to prompt the user to drag the dividing line to the left or right, and the electronic device can be controlled to display in a single window. For example, as shown in FIG. 10, in response to the user's finger touching the dividing line, the electronic device 100 may display the second prompt information 1005. The second prompt message 1005 may be "Hold down and drag left or right to control the phone to display in a single window!".
在另一些实施例中,上述应用显示方法还可以应用于包括图3所示的可纵向折叠的折叠屏的电子设备。本申请实施例的方法可以应用于这类电子设备的折叠屏展开,且折叠屏处于横屏状态下。首先,电子设备可以在折叠屏展开且处于横屏状态下,以单窗口显示第一应用的第一界面。即电子设备在折叠屏的第一显示区域和第二显示区域显示第一界面。此时,折叠屏不显示第一应用的第二界面。例如,如图11A中的(a)所示,电子设备100在横屏状态下,以单窗口显示“热点”应用的第一界面1101。然后,响应于上述第一操作,电子设备在横屏状态下,在第一显示区域显示第一界面的第一内容,在第二显示区域显示第一应用的第二界面。即电子设备以双窗口第一应用的两个界面。例如,响应于用户对图11A中的(a)所示的电子设备100的第一操作,如图11A中的(b)所示,电子设备100可以以双窗口显示“热点”应用的第一界面的第一内容1101(即第一界面1101)和第二界面1102。其中,第一界面的第一内容1101显示在电子设备的折叠屏的第一显示区域,第二界面1102显示在折叠屏的第二显示区域。In other embodiments, the application display method described above can also be applied to an electronic device including the vertically foldable folding screen shown in FIG. 3. The method of the embodiment of the present application can be applied to the unfolded folding screen of this type of electronic device, and the folding screen is in the horizontal screen state. First, the electronic device may display the first interface of the first application in a single window when the folding screen is expanded and in a landscape state. That is, the electronic device displays the first interface in the first display area and the second display area of the folding screen. At this time, the folding screen does not display the second interface of the first application. For example, as shown in (a) of FIG. 11A, the electronic device 100 displays the first interface 1101 of the "hot spot" application in a single window in the landscape state. Then, in response to the aforementioned first operation, the electronic device displays the first content of the first interface in the first display area and displays the second interface of the first application in the second display area in the horizontal screen state. That is, the two interfaces of the first application of the electronic device with dual windows. For example, in response to the user's first operation on the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 11A (a), as shown in FIG. 11A (b), the electronic device 100 may display the first "hot spot" application in a dual window. The first content 1101 (ie, the first interface 1101) and the second interface 1102 of the interface. The first content 1101 of the first interface is displayed in the first display area of the folding screen of the electronic device, and the second interface 1102 is displayed in the second display area of the folding screen.
进一步的,电子设备在横屏状态下,在第一显示区域显示第一界面的第一内容,在第二显示区域显示第一应用的第二界面之后,本申请实施例的方法还可以包括:响应于上述第二操作,电子设备在横屏状态下,以单窗口显示第一界面(且不显示第二界面)或第二界面的第二内容(且不显示第一界面)。例如,响应于用户对图11A中的(b)所示的电子设备100的第二操作,电子设备100可以单窗口显示图11A中的(a)所示的第一界面1101。Further, after the electronic device displays the first content of the first interface in the first display area in the horizontal screen state, and displays the second interface of the first application in the second display area, the method of the embodiment of the present application may further include: In response to the aforementioned second operation, the electronic device displays the first interface (and does not display the second interface) or the second content of the second interface (and does not display the first interface) in a single window in the horizontal screen state. For example, in response to the user's second operation on the electronic device 100 shown in (b) in FIG. 11A, the electronic device 100 may display the first interface 1101 shown in (a) in FIG. 11A in a single window.
其中,用户在使用电子设备时,电子设备可能是横屏状态或竖屏状态。电子设备的显示屏(包括处于展开状态的折叠屏)可以包括四条边,这四条边中包括相互平行且相等的两条长一点的边,可以称为显示屏的长边;这四条边中还包括相互平行且相等的两条短一点的边,可以称为显示屏的短边。在横屏状态下,电子设备的显示屏的长边与水平面平行(例如,如图11B中的(a)所示),即显示屏的长边与水平面的夹角为0;或者显示屏的长边01与水平面02的夹角03小于或者等于预设值1(例如,如图11B中的(b)所示)。其中,该预设值1小于或者等于45°,该预设值1的具体数值可以根据实际应用场景进行设定,例如,该预设值1可以为20°。在横屏状态下,电子设备的显示屏基本呈横条形。Among them, when a user uses an electronic device, the electronic device may be in a horizontal screen state or a vertical screen state. The display screen of the electronic device (including the folding screen in the unfolded state) may include four sides, including two parallel and equal longer sides, which can be called the long sides of the display screen; among the four sides It includes two shorter sides that are parallel and equal to each other, which can be called the short sides of the display screen. In the landscape state, the long side of the display screen of the electronic device is parallel to the horizontal plane (for example, as shown in (a) in Figure 11B), that is, the angle between the long side of the display screen and the horizontal plane is 0; or The angle 03 between the long side 01 and the horizontal plane 02 is less than or equal to the preset value 1 (for example, as shown in (b) in FIG. 11B). Wherein, the preset value 1 is less than or equal to 45°, and the specific value of the preset value 1 may be set according to actual application scenarios. For example, the preset value 1 may be 20°. In the landscape state, the display screen of the electronic device is basically a horizontal bar.
在横屏状态下,电子设备的显示屏的高小于宽,显示屏的高宽比(即高和宽的比)小于1。显示屏的高为显示屏与竖平面夹角较小的边的长度,显示屏的宽为显示屏与水平面夹角较小的边的长度。其中,显示屏的高也可以理解为显示屏的纵向长度,显示屏的宽也可以理解为显示屏的横向长度,显示屏的高宽比也可以理解为显示屏的纵横比(即纵向长度与横向长度的比)。In the landscape state, the height of the display screen of the electronic device is smaller than the width, and the aspect ratio (that is, the ratio of height to width) of the display screen is less than 1. The height of the display is the length of the side with the smaller angle between the display and the vertical plane, and the width of the display is the length of the side with the smaller angle between the display and the horizontal plane. Among them, the height of the display can also be understood as the vertical length of the display, the width of the display can also be understood as the horizontal length of the display, and the aspect ratio of the display can also be understood as the aspect ratio of the display (ie, the vertical length and The ratio of lateral length).
为了区别横屏状态与竖屏状态,本申请实施例这里对竖屏状态也进行介绍。在竖屏状态下,电子设备的显示屏的长边与水平面垂直(例如,如图11B中的(c)所示);或者显示屏的长边01与水平面02的夹角04大于预设值1(例如,如图11B中的(d)所示,该预设值1大于或者等于45°)。在竖屏状态下,电子设备的显示屏的高大于宽,显示屏的高宽比大于1,电子设备的显示屏基本呈竖条形。In order to distinguish the horizontal screen state and the vertical screen state, the embodiment of the present application also introduces the vertical screen state here. In the vertical screen state, the long side of the display screen of the electronic device is perpendicular to the horizontal plane (for example, as shown in (c) in Figure 11B); or the angle 04 between the long side 01 of the display screen and the horizontal plane 02 is greater than the preset value 1 (for example, as shown in (d) in FIG. 11B, the preset value 1 is greater than or equal to 45°). In the vertical screen state, the height of the display screen of the electronic device is greater than the width, and the aspect ratio of the display screen is greater than 1, and the display screen of the electronic device is basically a vertical bar.
本申请实施例中,响应于用户的第一操作或第二操作,电子设备100可以切换折叠屏的窗口模式(包括单窗口模式和双窗口模式),以不同的窗口模式向用户展示第一应用的内容。具体的,响应于第一操作,电子设备100可以将窗口模式切换为双窗口模式,在折叠屏显示第一应用的两个界面;响应于第二操作,电子设备100可以将窗口模式切换为单窗口模式,在折叠屏显示第一应用的一个界面。也就是说,本申请实施例中,电子设备100可以响应于用户的操作,按照用户的需求采用不同的窗口模式显示第一应用的内容,可以提升电子设备100与用户的交互性能。In the embodiment of the present application, in response to the user's first operation or second operation, the electronic device 100 can switch the window mode of the folding screen (including single window mode and dual window mode), and show the first application to the user in different window modes Content. Specifically, in response to the first operation, the electronic device 100 can switch the window mode to the dual window mode, and display the two interfaces of the first application on the folding screen; in response to the second operation, the electronic device 100 can switch the window mode to single In window mode, an interface of the first application is displayed on the folding screen. That is, in the embodiment of the present application, the electronic device 100 can display the content of the first application in different window modes according to the user's operation in response to the user's operation, which can improve the interaction performance between the electronic device 100 and the user.
在另一些实施例中,本申请实施例的方法还可以应用于非折叠屏电子设备。即电子设备的触摸屏是非折叠屏。具体的,可以应用于这类电子设备处于横屏状态下。首先,电子设备可以在横屏状态下,以单窗口显示第一应用的第一界面。即电子设备在触摸屏的第一显示区域和第二显示区域显示第一界面。此时,触摸屏不显示第一应用的第二界面。例如,如图12中的(a)所示,电子设备100在横屏状态下,以单窗口显示“热点”应用的第一界面1201。然后,响应于上述第一操作,电子设备在横屏状态下,在第一显示区域显示第一界面的第一内容,在第二显示区域显示第一应用的第二界面。即电子设备以双窗口第一应用的两个界面。例如,响应于用户对图12中的(a)所示的电子设备100的第一操作,如图12中的(b)所示,电子设备100可以以双窗口显示“热点”应用的第一界面的第一内容1201和第二界面1202。其中,第一界面1201显示在电子设备的折叠屏的第一显示区域,第二界面1202显示在折叠屏的第二显示区域。In other embodiments, the methods of the embodiments of the present application may also be applied to non-folding screen electronic devices. That is, the touch screen of the electronic device is a non-folding screen. Specifically, it can be applied to this type of electronic equipment in a landscape state. First, the electronic device can display the first interface of the first application in a single window in the landscape mode. That is, the electronic device displays the first interface in the first display area and the second display area of the touch screen. At this time, the touch screen does not display the second interface of the first application. For example, as shown in (a) of FIG. 12, the electronic device 100 displays the first interface 1201 of the "hot spot" application in a single window in the landscape state. Then, in response to the aforementioned first operation, the electronic device displays the first content of the first interface in the first display area and displays the second interface of the first application in the second display area in the horizontal screen state. That is, the two interfaces of the first application of the electronic device with dual windows. For example, in response to the user's first operation on the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 12(a), as shown in FIG. 12(b), the electronic device 100 may display the first "hot spot" application in a dual window. The first content 1201 and the second interface 1202 of the interface. The first interface 1201 is displayed in the first display area of the folding screen of the electronic device, and the second interface 1202 is displayed in the second display area of the folding screen.
进一步的,电子设备在横屏状态下,在第一显示区域显示第一界面的第一内容,在第二显示区域显示第一应用的第二界面之后,本申请实施例的方法还可以包括:响应于上述第二操作,电子设备在横屏状态下,以单窗口显示第一界面(且不显示第二界面)或第二界面的第二内容(且不显示第一界面)。例如,响应于用户对图12中的(b)所示的电子设备100的第二操作,电子设备100可以单窗口显示图12中的(a)所示的第一界面1201。Further, after the electronic device displays the first content of the first interface in the first display area in the horizontal screen state, and displays the second interface of the first application in the second display area, the method of the embodiment of the present application may further include: In response to the aforementioned second operation, the electronic device displays the first interface (and does not display the second interface) or the second content of the second interface (and does not display the first interface) in a single window in the horizontal screen state. For example, in response to the user's second operation on the electronic device 100 shown in (b) in FIG. 12, the electronic device 100 may display the first interface 1201 shown in (a) in FIG. 12 in a single window.
需要注意的是,对于非折叠屏电子设备而言,第一操作可以是上述实施例所述的第一操作中,除第一预设折叠操作之外的其他任一操作;第二操作可以是上述实施例所述的第二操作中,除第二预设折叠操作之外的其他任一操作。It should be noted that for non-folding screen electronic devices, the first operation may be any operation other than the first preset folding operation in the first operation described in the above embodiment; the second operation may be In the second operation described in the foregoing embodiment, any operation except the second preset folding operation.
需要说明的是,该实施例中的横屏状态可以参考上述实施例中对横屏状态的详细介绍,本申请实施例这里不予赘述。It should be noted that, for the horizontal screen state in this embodiment, reference may be made to the detailed description of the horizontal screen state in the foregoing embodiment, which is not repeated in the embodiment of the present application.
本申请实施例中,非折叠屏的电子设备处于横屏状态时,响应于用户的第一操作或第二操作,电子设备可以切换折叠屏的窗口模式(包括单窗口模式和双窗口模式),以不同的窗口模式向用户展示第一应用的内容。具体的,响应于第一操作,电子设备可以将窗口模式切换为单窗口模式,在折叠屏显示第一应用的一个界面;响应于第二操作,电子设备可以将窗口模式切换为双窗口模式,在折叠屏显示第一应用的两个界面。也就是说,本申请实施例中,电子设备可以响应于用户的操作,按照用户的需求采用不同的窗口模式显示第一应用的内容,可以提升电子设备与用户的交互性能。In the embodiments of the present application, when the electronic device with a non-folding screen is in a landscape state, in response to the user's first operation or second operation, the electronic device can switch the window mode of the folding screen (including single window mode and dual window mode), The content of the first application is presented to the user in different window modes. Specifically, in response to the first operation, the electronic device may switch the window mode to the single window mode, and display an interface of the first application on the folding screen; in response to the second operation, the electronic device may switch the window mode to the dual window mode, The two interfaces of the first application are displayed on the folding screen. That is, in the embodiment of the present application, the electronic device can respond to the user's operation and display the content of the first application in different window modes according to the user's needs, which can improve the interaction performance between the electronic device and the user.
在一些实施例中,电子设备在横屏状态下的显示屏(包括折叠屏或非折叠屏)包括的多 个显示区域可以是用户设置的。本申请实施例这里以处于展开状态的折叠屏为例,对用户设置多个显示区域的方法进行说明。In some embodiments, a display screen (including a folding screen or a non-folding screen) of the electronic device in the landscape state includes multiple display areas that may be set by the user. In this embodiment of the present application, a folding screen in an expanded state is taken as an example to describe a method for a user to set multiple display areas.
例如,如图13所示,电子设备的设置界面1301上显示有显示区域的设置控件,用户可以自行设置第一显示区域的纵横比(即高宽比)和第二显示区域的纵横比,或者用户可以从设置界面上选择第一显示区域的纵横比和第二显示区域的纵横比。For example, as shown in FIG. 13, the setting interface 1301 of the electronic device displays the setting controls of the display area, and the user can set the aspect ratio (that is, the aspect ratio) of the first display area and the aspect ratio of the second display area, or The user can select the aspect ratio of the first display area and the aspect ratio of the second display area from the setting interface.
又例如,如图14中的(a)所示,电子设备100的设置界面1401上显示有横屏状态下的显示区域数量设置控件1402和显示区域的范围设置控件1403。在用户设置显示区域的数量为2,并点击控件1403之后,如图14中的(b)所示,电子设备100可以提示用户设置第一显示区域的范围,用户可以在显示屏上拖动以设置第一显示区域的范围。在用户停止拖动后,如图14中的(c)所示,电子设备100可以显示确定第一显示区域的范围的控件1404和取消设置的控件1405。在用户点击控件1404后,参见图14中的(d),电子设备100可以确定用户设置的第一显示区域和第二显示区域的范围。For another example, as shown in (a) of FIG. 14, the setting interface 1401 of the electronic device 100 displays a display area quantity setting control 1402 and a display area range setting control 1403 in a landscape state. After the user sets the number of display areas to 2, and clicks the control 1403, as shown in (b) in FIG. 14, the electronic device 100 may prompt the user to set the range of the first display area, and the user may drag on the display screen to Set the range of the first display area. After the user stops dragging, as shown in (c) of FIG. 14, the electronic device 100 may display a control 1404 for determining the range of the first display area and a control 1405 for canceling the setting. After the user clicks on the control 1404, referring to (d) in FIG. 14, the electronic device 100 can determine the range of the first display area and the second display area set by the user.
再例如,在用户于设置界面1401上设置显示区域的数量为2,并点击控件1403之后,如图14中的(d)所示,电子设备100的设置界面上显示有分界线1406,用户可以拖动分界线1406以设定第一显示区域和第二显示区域的尺寸和纵横比。For another example, after the user sets the number of display areas on the setting interface 1401 to 2 and clicks the control 1403, as shown in (d) in FIG. 14, the setting interface of the electronic device 100 displays a dividing line 1406, and the user can Drag the dividing line 1406 to set the size and aspect ratio of the first display area and the second display area.
当然,用户还可以通过其他方式设置电子设备100的显示屏包括的显示区域,本申请实施例不予限定。Of course, the user can also set the display area included in the display screen of the electronic device 100 in other ways, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
可以理解,对于上述包括折叠屏或非折叠屏的电子设备而言,其触摸屏都比较大。因此,当折叠屏处于展开状态或者非折叠屏处于横屏状态时,为了便于操作,用户可以双手握持电子设备。但是,目前电子设备上的功能键(如锁屏键或音量键等)的位置和一些应用的快捷启动,大都是为了方便用户在折叠屏处于折叠状态或者非折叠屏处于竖屏状态时,单手操作而设计的,用户单手操作比较方便。例如,上述一些应用可以包括:“照相机”应用、“手电筒”应用或“语音助手”应用等。而当折叠屏处于展开状态或者非折叠屏处于横屏状态时,用户无法便捷的操作上述功能键或者启动上述一些应用。It can be understood that for the above-mentioned electronic devices including folding screens or non-folding screens, the touch screens are relatively large. Therefore, when the folding screen is in the unfolded state or the non-folding screen is in the landscape state, in order to facilitate operation, the user can hold the electronic device with both hands. However, the position of the function keys (such as the lock screen key or the volume key, etc.) on the current electronic devices and the quick launch of some applications are mostly for the convenience of the user when the folding screen is in the folded state or the non-folding screen is in the vertical screen state. Designed for manual operation, it is more convenient for users to operate with one hand. For example, some of the above-mentioned applications may include: "camera" application, "flashlight" application, or "voice assistant" application. When the folding screen is in the unfolded state or the non-folding screen is in the landscape state, the user cannot conveniently operate the above function keys or start some of the above applications.
为了解决上述问题,本实施例提供一种应用显示方法。该方法可以应用于包括触摸屏的电子设备。该触摸屏可以折叠屏,也可以是非折叠屏。需要注意的是,本申请实施例中的折叠屏处于展开状态,非折叠屏处于横屏状态。该方法可以包括S1501-S1502。In order to solve the above problem, this embodiment provides an application display method. The method can be applied to electronic devices including touch screens. The touch screen can be a folding screen or a non-folding screen. It should be noted that the folding screen in the embodiment of the present application is in the unfolded state, and the non-folding screen is in the landscape state. The method may include S1501-S1502.
S1501:响应于用户的第三操作,电子设备可以在触摸屏显示一个或多个第一控件。S1501: In response to the third operation of the user, the electronic device may display one or more first controls on the touch screen.
其中,一个或多个第一控件可以包括:一个或多个第三应用的控件;和/或,一个或多个功能键的控件。例如,第三应用可以是“照相机”应用、“手电筒”应用或“语音助手”应用等。功能键可以是锁屏键、音量键(包括音量+键和音量-键)或者Home键等。Wherein, the one or more first controls may include: one or more third application controls; and/or one or more function key controls. For example, the third application may be a "camera" application, a "flashlight" application, or a "voice assistant" application. The function keys can be lock screen keys, volume keys (including volume + key and volume-key), or home key.
第三应用的控件用于触发电子设备启动第三应用。例如,图16所示的“照相机”应用的控件1601用于触发电子设备启动摄像头,以采集图像。图16所示的“语音助手”应用的控件1603用于触发电子设备启动语音助手。功能键的控件用于触发电子设备执行该功能键对应的事件。例如,锁屏键的控件1602用于触发电子设备锁屏,音量+键用于触发电子设备调高音量。The control of the third application is used to trigger the electronic device to start the third application. For example, the control 1601 of the "camera" application shown in FIG. 16 is used to trigger the electronic device to start the camera to capture images. The control 1603 of the "voice assistant" application shown in FIG. 16 is used to trigger the electronic device to start the voice assistant. The control of the function key is used to trigger the electronic device to execute the event corresponding to the function key. For example, the control 1602 of the lock screen key is used to trigger the electronic device to lock the screen, and the volume + key is used to trigger the electronic device to increase the volume.
在一些实现方式中,第三操作与上述第一操作、第二操作可以不同。示例性的,第三操作可以包括第五滑动操作和第六滑动操作。第五滑动操作可以是用户在第一显示区域的输入的由下向上的滑动操作,第六滑动操作可以是用户在第二显示区域输入的由下向上的滑动操作。例如,第五滑动操作可以是用户在图15中的(a)所示的第一显示区域1501的输入的由下向上的滑动操作1503b,第六滑动操作可以是用户在图15中的(a)所示的第二显示区域1502输入的右下向上的滑动操作1503a。In some implementation manners, the third operation may be different from the first and second operations described above. Exemplarily, the third operation may include a fifth sliding operation and a sixth sliding operation. The fifth sliding operation may be a bottom-up sliding operation input by the user in the first display area, and the sixth sliding operation may be a bottom-up sliding operation input by the user in the second display area. For example, the fifth sliding operation may be a bottom-up sliding operation 1503b input by the user in the first display area 1501 shown in FIG. 15(a), and the sixth sliding operation may be the user's (a) ) Shown in the second display area 1502 to input the lower right and upward sliding operation 1503a.
或者,第五滑动操作可以是用户在第一显示区域的输入的由上向下的滑动操作,第六滑动操作可以是用户在第二显示区域输入的由下向下的滑动操作。例如,第五滑动操作可以是用户在图15中的(b)所示的第一显示区域1501的输入的由下向上的滑动操作1504b,第六滑动操作可以是用户在图15中的(b)所示的第二显示区域1502输入的右下向上的滑动操作1504a。Alternatively, the fifth sliding operation may be a top-down sliding operation input by the user in the first display area, and the sixth sliding operation may be a bottom-down sliding operation input by the user in the second display area. For example, the fifth sliding operation may be a bottom-up sliding operation 1504b input by the user in the first display area 1501 shown in FIG. 15(b), and the sixth sliding operation may be the user's (b) ) Shown in the second display area 1502 to input the lower right and upward sliding operation 1504a.
在另一些实现方式中,第三操作与第一操作或第二操作可以相同。In other implementations, the third operation may be the same as the first operation or the second operation.
需要注意的是,当本申请所有方法实施例所述的方法均在电子设备中实现时,第三操作与上述第一操作、第二操作不同。当电子设备中仅实现S1501-S1502对应的方法时,第三操作与上述第一操作、第二操作可以相同。It should be noted that when all the methods described in the method embodiments of this application are implemented in an electronic device, the third operation is different from the first and second operations described above. When only the methods corresponding to S1501-S1502 are implemented in the electronic device, the third operation may be the same as the first and second operations described above.
其中,在S1501之前,电子设备显示第三界面。其中,该第三界面可以是任一应用的一个界面。例如,第三界面可以是图15中的(a)所示的界面1505,即“淘宝”应用的商品详情页。或者,第三界面可以包括上述第一界面和第二界面。例如,第三界面可以包括图15中的(b)所示的第一界面1506(即“淘宝”应用的搜索结果页)和第二界面1507(即“淘宝”应用的首页)。S1501具体可以为:电子设备接收用户在第三界面的第三操作。也就是说,电子设备解锁后,显示任一界面时,都可以接收用户的第三操作,并响应于第三操作,显示一个或多个第一控件。Wherein, before S1501, the electronic device displays the third interface. Wherein, the third interface can be an interface of any application. For example, the third interface may be the interface 1505 shown in (a) of FIG. 15, that is, the product detail page of the "Taobao" application. Alternatively, the third interface may include the aforementioned first interface and second interface. For example, the third interface may include the first interface 1506 (that is, the search result page of the "Taobao" application) and the second interface 1507 (that is, the homepage of the "Taobao" application) shown in (b) of FIG. 15. S1501 may specifically be: the electronic device receives the third operation of the user on the third interface. That is, after the electronic device is unlocked, when any interface is displayed, it can receive the third operation of the user, and in response to the third operation, display one or more first controls.
例如,以上述触摸屏是折叠屏为例。折叠屏处于展开状态时,无论该折叠屏以单窗口显示一个界面,还是以双窗口显示两个界面,该折叠屏都可以接收用户的第三操作,并响应于第三操作,显示一个或多个第一控件。For example, take the above-mentioned touch screen as a folding screen. When the folding screen is in the expanded state, whether the folding screen displays one interface in a single window or two interfaces in dual windows, the folding screen can receive the user's third operation, and in response to the third operation, display one or more The first control.
例如,如图15中的(a)所示,电子设备以单窗口显示“淘宝”应用的一个界面时,电子设备可接收用户的第三操作。又例如,如图15中的(b)所示,电子设备以双窗口显示“淘宝”应用的两个界面时,电子设备可接收用户的第三操作。For example, as shown in (a) of FIG. 15, when the electronic device displays an interface of the "Taobao" application in a single window, the electronic device can receive the third operation of the user. For another example, as shown in FIG. 15(b), when the electronic device displays two interfaces of the "Taobao" application in dual windows, the electronic device can receive the third operation of the user.
以电子设备显示图15中的(b)所示的界面时,接收用户的第三操作为例。响应于第三操作,电子设备可显示图16所示的多个第一控件。图16所示的多个第一控件包括:“照相机”应用的控件1601、“锁屏键”应用的控件1602和“语音助手”应用的控件1603。Take the third operation of the user when the electronic device displays the interface shown in (b) of FIG. 15 as an example. In response to the third operation, the electronic device may display multiple first controls shown in FIG. 16. The multiple first controls shown in FIG. 16 include: a control 1601 of a "camera" application, a control 1602 of a "lock screen key" application, and a control 1603 of a "voice assistant" application.
在一些实施例中,为了方便用户操作,响应于用户的第三操作,电子设备可以在触摸屏的高频触控区域显示上述一个或多个第一控件。其中,高频触控区域是触摸屏上被用户操作的频率或者次数高于第一阈值的触控区域。高频触控区域可以是触摸屏左侧的高频触控区域,或者右侧的高频触控区域。例如,以电子设备的触摸屏是非折叠屏为例。如图17所示,该电子设备处于横屏状态。响应于第三操作,如图17所示,电子设备可以在触摸屏的右侧高频触控区域,显示多个第一控件1701。In some embodiments, in order to facilitate user operations, in response to the user's third operation, the electronic device may display the above-mentioned one or more first controls on the high-frequency touch area of the touch screen. Wherein, the high-frequency touch area is a touch area on the touch screen whose frequency or number of operations by the user is higher than the first threshold. The high-frequency touch area may be the high-frequency touch area on the left side of the touch screen or the high-frequency touch area on the right side. For example, take the touch screen of the electronic device as a non-folding screen. As shown in Figure 17, the electronic device is in a landscape state. In response to the third operation, as shown in FIG. 17, the electronic device may display multiple first controls 1701 in the high-frequency touch area on the right side of the touch screen.
举例来说,电子设备可以获取用户在触摸屏上输入的左手手势(即左手手指输入的手势)和右手手势(即右手手指输入的手势)的滑动轨迹;统计左手手势的滑动轨迹的点(简称左侧轨迹点)在触摸屏中的分布情况,将触摸屏中左侧轨迹点分布较多的区域确定为左侧的高频触控区域;统计右手手势的滑动轨迹的点(简称右侧轨迹点)在触摸屏中的分布情况,将触摸屏中右侧轨迹点分布较多的区域确定为右侧的高频触控区域。其中,轨迹点分布较多的区域是指触摸屏中轨迹点的密集程度高于一定阈值的区域。For example, the electronic device can obtain the sliding trajectory of the left-hand gesture (ie the gesture input by the left-hand finger) and the right-hand gesture (ie the gesture input by the right-hand finger) input by the user on the touch screen; The distribution of side track points) in the touch screen, the area with more track points on the left side of the touch screen is determined as the high-frequency touch area on the left; the points of the sliding track of the right hand gesture (referred to as the right track point) are For the distribution in the touch screen, the area with more track points on the right side of the touch screen is determined as the high-frequency touch area on the right. Among them, the area where the track points are more distributed refers to the area where the density of the track points in the touch screen is higher than a certain threshold.
需要说明的是,电子设备确定触摸屏的高频触控区域的其他方法,可以参考常规技术中确定触摸屏的高频触控区域的方法,本申请实施例这里不予赘述。It should be noted that other methods for the electronic device to determine the high-frequency touch area of the touch screen may refer to the method of determining the high-frequency touch area of the touch screen in the conventional technology, which will not be repeated in the embodiment of the present application.
S1502:响应于用户对一个第一控件的点击操作(如单击操作或双击操作等),电子设备执行该第一控件所触发的事件。S1502: In response to a user's click operation on a first control (such as a single click operation or a double-click operation, etc.), the electronic device executes an event triggered by the first control.
例如,响应于用户对图16所示的“照相机”应用的控件1601的点击操作(如单击操作),电子设备可启动摄像头,并显示“照相机”应用的图像预览界面(附图未示出)。又例如,响应于用户对图16所示的“锁屏键”应用的控件1602的点击操作(如单击操作),电子设备可锁屏,显示锁屏界面(附图未示出)。For example, in response to a user's click operation (such as a single click operation) on the control 1601 of the "camera" application shown in FIG. 16, the electronic device may start the camera and display the image preview interface of the "camera" application (not shown in the figure) ). For another example, in response to a user's click operation (such as a click operation) on the control 1602 of the "lock screen key" application shown in FIG. 16, the electronic device may lock the screen and display a lock screen interface (not shown in the drawings).
本申请实施例中,响应于用户的第三操作,电子设备可显示一个或多个第一控件。如此,用户便可以通过该一个或多个第一控件控制电子设备,可以为用户提供更加便捷、舒适的操作体验。In the embodiment of the present application, in response to the third operation of the user, the electronic device may display one or more first controls. In this way, the user can control the electronic device through the one or more first controls, which can provide the user with a more convenient and comfortable operating experience.
在一些实施例中,响应于上述第三操作,电子设备还可以将触摸屏上当前显示的内容(如第三界面)以一定比例缩小后显示在触摸屏的左下角区域或者由下角区域,以方便用户操作。In some embodiments, in response to the aforementioned third operation, the electronic device may also reduce the content currently displayed on the touch screen (such as the third interface) to a certain ratio and display it in the lower left corner area or from the lower corner area of the touch screen to facilitate the user operating.
可以理解,对于上述包括折叠屏或非折叠屏的电子设备而言,其触摸屏都比较大。触摸屏较大时,用户无法便捷的操作触摸屏的部分触控区域。例如,用户无法便捷的操作图18所示的虚线框1801对应的触控区域。It can be understood that for the above-mentioned electronic devices including folding screens or non-folding screens, the touch screens are relatively large. When the touch screen is large, the user cannot easily operate part of the touch area of the touch screen. For example, the user cannot conveniently operate the touch area corresponding to the dashed frame 1801 shown in FIG. 18.
为了解决上述问题,本实施例提供一种应用显示方法。该方法可以应用于包括触摸屏的电子设备。该触摸屏可以折叠屏,也可以是非折叠屏。需要注意的是,本申请实施例中的折叠屏处于展开状态,非折叠屏处于横屏状态。该方法可以包括:电子设备显示第三界面;响应于用户的第四操作,电子设备显示一个或多个第二控件;响应于用户对一个第二控件的点击操作,电子设备可执行相应的事件。其中,一个或多个第二控件是所述第三界面中、位于触摸屏的预设触控区域的控件。其中,预设触控区域是触摸屏中用户不方便操作是触控区域。该预设触控区域可以预先配置在电子设备中。或者,该预设触控区域可以由用户设置。其中,第三界面的详细描述可以参考上述实例中的相关内容,本申请实施例这里不予赘述。In order to solve the above problem, this embodiment provides an application display method. The method can be applied to electronic devices including touch screens. The touch screen can be a folding screen or a non-folding screen. It should be noted that the folding screen in the embodiment of the present application is in the unfolded state, and the non-folding screen is in the landscape state. The method may include: the electronic device displays a third interface; in response to a user's fourth operation, the electronic device displays one or more second controls; in response to a user's click operation on a second control, the electronic device can execute a corresponding event . Wherein, the one or more second controls are controls located in the preset touch area of the touch screen in the third interface. Among them, the preset touch area is the touch area that is inconvenient for the user to operate on the touch screen. The preset touch area can be pre-configured in the electronic device. Alternatively, the preset touch area can be set by the user. For the detailed description of the third interface, reference may be made to the relevant content in the above-mentioned example, which is not repeated in the embodiment of the present application.
例如,以第三界面包括图18所示的“淘宝”应用的搜索结果页1805和“淘宝”应用的首页1806为例。在图18所示的预设触控区域1801,第三界面包括三个第二控件,如“扫一扫”控件1802a、“会员码”控件1803a和“搜索框”控件1804a。响应于用户的第四操作,如图18所示,电子设备可显示“扫一扫”控件1802b、“会员码”控件1803b和“搜索框”控件1804b。其中,“扫一扫”控件1802b与“扫一扫”控件1802a的功能相同,“会员码”控件1803a与“会员码”控件1803a的功能相同,“搜索框”控件1804b与“搜索框”控件1804a的功能相同。For example, take the third interface including the search result page 1805 of the "Taobao" application and the home page 1806 of the "Taobao" application shown in FIG. 18 as an example. In the preset touch area 1801 shown in FIG. 18, the third interface includes three second controls, such as a "scan" control 1802a, a "member code" control 1803a, and a "search box" control 1804a. In response to the user's fourth operation, as shown in FIG. 18, the electronic device may display a "scan" control 1802b, a "member code" control 1803b, and a "search box" control 1804b. Among them, the "scan" control 1802b has the same function as the "scan" control 1802a, the "member code" control 1803a has the same function as the "member code" control 1803a, and the "search box" control 1804b has the same function as the "search box" control. 1804a has the same function.
其中,第四操作与上述第三操作可以相同,也可以不同。在一些实施例中,响应于第四操作,电子设备不仅可以显示一个或多个第二控件,还可以显示一个或多个第一控件。Wherein, the fourth operation and the above-mentioned third operation may be the same or different. In some embodiments, in response to the fourth operation, the electronic device may display not only one or more second controls, but also one or more first controls.
在一些实施例中,为了方便用户操作,响应于用户的第四操作,电子设备可以在触摸屏的高频触控区域显示上述一个或多个第二控件。In some embodiments, in order to facilitate user operations, in response to the user's fourth operation, the electronic device may display the above-mentioned one or more second controls in the high-frequency touch area of the touch screen.
本申请实施例中,响应于用户的第四操作,电子设备可显示一个或多个第二控件。如此,用户便可以通过该一个或多个第二控件,操作电子设备当前所需显示的界面,可以为用户提供更加便捷、舒适的操作体验。In the embodiment of the present application, in response to the user's fourth operation, the electronic device may display one or more second controls. In this way, the user can use the one or more second controls to operate the interface that the electronic device currently needs to display, which can provide the user with a more convenient and comfortable operating experience.
本申请另一些实施例还提供了一种电子设备,该电子设备可以包括:上述触摸屏(如折叠屏或非折叠屏)、存储器和一个或多个处理器。该触摸屏、存储器和处理器耦合。该存储器用于存储计算机程序代码,该计算机程序代码包括计算机指令。当处理器执行计算机指令时,电子设备可执行上述方法实施例中手机执行的各个功能或者步骤。该电子设备的结构可以参考图6所示的电子设备100的结构。Other embodiments of the present application also provide an electronic device, which may include: the aforementioned touch screen (such as a folding screen or a non-folding screen), a memory, and one or more processors. The touch screen, memory and processor are coupled. The memory is used to store computer program code, and the computer program code includes computer instructions. When the processor executes the computer instructions, the electronic device can execute various functions or steps executed by the mobile phone in the foregoing method embodiments. The structure of the electronic device can refer to the structure of the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 6.
本申请另一些实施例还提供一种显示装置,其特征在于,该装置可以应用于包括上述触摸屏的电子设备。该装置用于执行上述方法实施例中手机执行的各个功能或者步骤。Other embodiments of the present application further provide a display device, which is characterized in that the device can be applied to an electronic device including the aforementioned touch screen. The device is used to execute various functions or steps performed by the mobile phone in the above method embodiments.
本申请实施例还提供一种芯片***,如图19所示,该芯片***包括至少一个处理器1901 和至少一个接口电路1902。处理器1901和接口电路1902可通过线路互联。例如,接口电路1902可用于从其它装置(例如电子设备的存储器)接收信号。又例如,接口电路1902可用于向其它装置(例如处理器1901)发送信号。示例性的,接口电路1902可读取存储器中存储的指令,并将该指令发送给处理器1901。当所述指令被处理器1901执行时,可使得电子设备执行上述实施例中的各个步骤。当然,该芯片***还可以包含其他分立器件,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。The embodiment of the present application also provides a chip system. As shown in FIG. 19, the chip system includes at least one processor 1901 and at least one interface circuit 1902. The processor 1901 and the interface circuit 1902 may be interconnected by wires. For example, the interface circuit 1902 may be used to receive signals from other devices (such as the memory of an electronic device). For another example, the interface circuit 1902 may be used to send signals to other devices (such as the processor 1901). Exemplarily, the interface circuit 1902 can read an instruction stored in the memory, and send the instruction to the processor 1901. When the instructions are executed by the processor 1901, the electronic device may execute the steps in the foregoing embodiments. Of course, the chip system may also include other discrete devices, which are not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机存储介质,该计算机存储介质包括计算机指令,当所述计算机指令在上述电子设备上运行时,使得该电子设备执行上述方法实施例中手机执行的各个功能或者步骤。The embodiments of the present application also provide a computer storage medium, the computer storage medium includes computer instructions, when the computer instructions run on the above-mentioned electronic device, the electronic device is caused to execute each function or step performed by the mobile phone in the above-mentioned method embodiment .
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品,当所述计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行上述方法实施例中手机执行的各个功能或者步骤。The embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product, which when the computer program product runs on a computer, causes the computer to execute each function or step performed by the mobile phone in the above method embodiment.
通过以上实施方式的描述,所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,仅以上述各功能模块的划分进行举例说明,实际应用中,可以根据需要而将上述功能分配由不同的功能模块完成,即将装置的内部结构划分成不同的功能模块,以完成以上描述的全部或者部分功能。Through the description of the above embodiments, those skilled in the art can clearly understand that for the convenience and conciseness of the description, only the division of the above-mentioned functional modules is used as an example. In practical applications, the above-mentioned functions can be allocated by Different functional modules are completed, that is, the internal structure of the device is divided into different functional modules to complete all or part of the functions described above.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述模块或单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个装置,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed device and method may be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are merely illustrative. For example, the division of the modules or units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods, for example, multiple units or components may be It can be combined or integrated into another device, or some features can be omitted or not implemented. In addition, the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是一个物理单元或多个物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个不同地方。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate parts may or may not be physically separate. The parts displayed as units may be one physical unit or multiple physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed to multiple different places. . Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objectives of the solutions of the embodiments.
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。上述集成的单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能单元的形式实现。In addition, the functional units in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist alone physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit. The above-mentioned integrated unit can be implemented in the form of hardware or software functional unit.
所述集成的单元如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请实施例的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的全部或部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一个设备(可以是单片机,芯片等)或处理器(processor)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read only memory,ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。If the integrated unit is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application are essentially or the part that contributes to the prior art, or all or part of the technical solutions can be embodied in the form of software products, which are stored in a storage medium There are several instructions to make a device (which may be a single-chip microcomputer, a chip, etc.) or a processor (processor) execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the embodiments of the present application. The aforementioned storage medium includes: U disk, mobile hard disk, read only memory (read only memory, ROM), random access memory (random access memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program codes.
以上内容,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何在本申请揭露的技术范围内的变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。The above content is only the specific implementation of this application, but the protection scope of this application is not limited to this, and any changes or substitutions within the technical scope disclosed in this application should be covered within the protection scope of this application. Therefore, the protection scope of this application should be subject to the protection scope of the claims.

Claims (19)

  1. 一种应用显示方法,其特征在于,应用于电子设备,所述电子设备包括触摸屏,所述方法包括:An application display method, characterized in that it is applied to an electronic device, the electronic device includes a touch screen, and the method includes:
    所述电子设备在所述触摸屏的第一显示区域和第二显示区域,显示第一应用的第一界面,所述第一界面包括第一内容,所述触摸屏不显示所述第一应用的第二界面;The electronic device displays the first interface of the first application in the first display area and the second display area of the touch screen, the first interface includes first content, and the touch screen does not display the first interface of the first application. Two interface
    响应于用户的第一操作,所述电子设备在所述第一显示区域显示所述第一内容,在所述第二显示区域显示所述第二界面,所述第二界面包括第二内容;In response to the user's first operation, the electronic device displays the first content in the first display area and displays the second interface in the second display area, and the second interface includes second content;
    响应于用户的第二操作,所述电子设备在所述第一显示区域和所述第二显示区域显示所述第一界面,不显示所述第二界面,或者,在所述第一显示区域和所述第二显示区域显示所述第二内容,不显示所述第一界面。In response to the second operation of the user, the electronic device displays the first interface in the first display area and the second display area, but does not display the second interface, or, in the first display area And the second display area displays the second content, but does not display the first interface.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述触摸屏是折叠屏,所述折叠屏可折叠形成至少两个屏,所述至少两个屏包括第一屏和第二屏;The method according to claim 1, wherein the touch screen is a folding screen, the folding screen can be folded to form at least two screens, and the at least two screens include a first screen and a second screen;
    其中,所述折叠屏处于展开状态;所述展开状态是所述第一屏和所述第二屏的夹角大于预设夹角阈值的状态。The folding screen is in an unfolded state; the unfolded state is a state where the angle between the first screen and the second screen is greater than a preset angle threshold.
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 2, wherein the method further comprises:
    响应于所述折叠屏由所述展开状态转换为折叠状态,所述电子设备在所述第一屏显示所述第一界面,不显示所述第二界面;In response to the folding screen transitioning from the unfolded state to the folded state, the electronic device displays the first interface on the first screen and does not display the second interface;
    其中,所述折叠状态是所述第一屏和所述第二屏的夹角小于或等于所述预设夹角阈值的状态。Wherein, the folded state is a state where the angle between the first screen and the second screen is less than or equal to the preset angle threshold.
  4. 根据权利要求2或3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一显示区域是所述第一屏对应的显示区域,所述第二显示区域是所述第二屏对应的显示区域。The method according to claim 2 or 3, wherein the first display area is a display area corresponding to the first screen, and the second display area is a display area corresponding to the second screen.
  5. 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一显示区域不是所述第一屏对应的显示区域;The method according to claim 3, wherein the first display area is not a display area corresponding to the first screen;
    所述响应于所述折叠屏由所述展开状态转换为折叠状态,所述电子设备在所述第一屏显示所述第一界面,包括:The step of displaying the first interface on the first screen by the electronic device in response to the transition of the folding screen from the unfolded state to the folded state includes:
    响应于所述第一屏和所述第二屏的夹角逐渐变小,所述电子设备在所述触摸屏显示所述第一界面由界面布局适配所述第一显示区域向界面布局适配所述第一屏动态变化的图像,直至所述第一屏和所述第二屏的夹角等于所述预设夹角阈值,所述电子设备在所述第一屏显示所述第一界面;In response to the angle between the first screen and the second screen gradually becoming smaller, the electronic device displays the first interface on the touch screen and adapts the interface layout from the interface layout to the interface layout adaptation. The dynamically changing image of the first screen until the angle between the first screen and the second screen is equal to the preset angle threshold, and the electronic device displays the first interface on the first screen ;
    其中,所述第一屏和所述第二屏的夹角大于所述预设夹角阈值时,所述电子设备在所述第一屏显示所述第一界面。Wherein, when the included angle between the first screen and the second screen is greater than the preset included angle threshold, the electronic device displays the first interface on the first screen.
  6. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述电子设备处于横屏状态;其中,所述横屏状态是所述触摸屏的长边与水平面的夹角小于预设值的状态。The method according to claim 1, wherein the electronic device is in a horizontal screen state; wherein the horizontal screen state is a state where the angle between the long side of the touch screen and the horizontal plane is less than a preset value.
  7. 根据权利要求2、3、5或6中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一显示区域和所述第二显示区域预先配置在所述电子设备中;或者,所述第一显示区域和所述第二显示区域由用户在所述电子设备中设置。The method according to any one of claims 2, 3, 5 or 6, wherein the first display area and the second display area are pre-configured in the electronic device; or, the first display area A display area and the second display area are set by the user in the electronic device.
  8. 根据权利要求1-7中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-7, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述电子设备接收用户对所述第一显示区域和所述第二显示区域的分割线的拖动操作;Receiving, by the electronic device, a user's drag operation on the dividing line of the first display area and the second display area;
    响应于所述拖动操作,所述电子设备在所述触摸屏显示所述第一显示区域和所述第二显示区域的大小随着所述分割线的移动而变化的动态图像;In response to the drag operation, the electronic device displays a dynamic image in which the sizes of the first display area and the second display area change with the movement of the dividing line on the touch screen;
    其中,变化后的第一显示区域和第二显示区域的分割线位于所述拖动操作的停止位置。Wherein, the dividing line between the changed first display area and the second display area is located at the stop position of the drag operation.
  9. 根据权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一显示区域位于所述分割线的右侧,所述第二显示区域位于所述分割线的左侧;8. The method according to claim 8, wherein the first display area is located on the right side of the dividing line, and the second display area is located on the left side of the dividing line;
    其中,当所述第二操作是用户对所述分割线的向左拖动操作,且向左拖动的拖动距离大于预设距离时,所述电子设备在所述触摸屏显示所述第一界面;当所述第二操作是用户对所述分割线的向右拖动操作,且向右拖动的拖动距离大于所述预设距离时,所述电子设备在所述触摸屏显示所述第二内容。Wherein, when the second operation is a leftward drag operation of the user on the dividing line, and the drag distance of the leftward drag is greater than a preset distance, the electronic device displays the first Interface; when the second operation is a right drag operation of the dividing line by the user, and the drag distance of the right drag is greater than the preset distance, the electronic device displays the The second content.
  10. 根据权利要求9所述的方法,其特征在于,所述响应于用户的第二操作,所述电子设备在所述触摸屏显示所述第一界面或所述第二内容,包括:The method according to claim 9, wherein the displaying the first interface or the second content on the touch screen by the electronic device in response to a second operation of the user comprises:
    响应于所述第二操作,所述电子设备在所述触摸屏显示所述第一界面的界面布局适配所述第一显示区域动态变化的图像,所述第二界面的界面布局适配所述第二显示区域动态变化的图像,直至所述第二操作对所述分割线的拖动距离大于所述预设距离,所述电子设备在所述触摸屏显示所述第一界面或所述第二内容。In response to the second operation, the electronic device displays the interface layout of the first interface on the touch screen to adapt to the dynamically changing image of the first display area, and the interface layout of the second interface adapts to the The second display area dynamically changes images until the second operation drags the dividing line for a distance greater than the preset distance, and the electronic device displays the first interface or the second interface on the touch screen content.
  11. 根据权利要求1-10中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一操作包括:第一滑动操作和第二滑动操作,所述第二操作包括:第三滑动操作和第四滑动操作;The method according to any one of claims 1-10, wherein the first operation comprises: a first sliding operation and a second sliding operation, and the second operation comprises: a third sliding operation and a fourth sliding operation. Sliding operation
    所述第一滑动操作是在所述第一显示区域输入的由左向右的滑动操作,所述第二滑动操作是在所述第二显示区域输入的由右向左的滑动操作,所述第三滑动操作是在所述第一显示区域输入的由右向左的滑动操作,所述第四滑动操作是在所述第二显示区域输入的由左向右的滑动操作;The first sliding operation is a sliding operation from left to right input in the first display area, the second sliding operation is a sliding operation from right to left input in the second display area, the The third sliding operation is a sliding operation from right to left input in the first display area, and the fourth sliding operation is a sliding operation from left to right input in the second display area;
    或者,or,
    所述第一滑动操作是在所述第一显示区域输入的由右向左的滑动操作,所述第二滑动操作是在所述第二显示区域输入的由左向右的滑动操作,所述第三滑动操作是在所述第一显示区域输入的由左向右的滑动操作,所述第四滑动操作是在所述第二显示区域输入的由右向左的滑动操作。The first sliding operation is a sliding operation from right to left input in the first display area, the second sliding operation is a sliding operation from left to right input in the second display area, the The third sliding operation is a sliding operation from left to right input in the first display area, and the fourth sliding operation is a sliding operation from right to left input in the second display area.
  12. 根据权利要求11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一滑动操作和所述第二滑动操作是弧形滑动操作;和/或,所述第三滑动操作和所述第四滑动操作是弧形滑动操作。The method according to claim 11, wherein the first sliding operation and the second sliding operation are arc-shaped sliding operations; and/or the third sliding operation and the fourth sliding operation are Arc sliding operation.
  13. 根据权利要求2-5中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一操作是对所述折叠屏的第一预设折叠操作;所述第二操作是对所述折叠屏的第二预设折叠操作;The method according to any one of claims 2-5, wherein the first operation is a first preset folding operation for the folding screen; the second operation is for the folding screen The second preset folding operation;
    其中,所述第一预设折叠操作与所述第二预设折叠操作不同。Wherein, the first preset folding operation is different from the second preset folding operation.
  14. 根据权利要求1-13中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二界面是所述第一应用的首页;或者,所述第二界面是所述第一界面的上一层级的界面;或者,所述第二界面是所述电子设备显示所述第一界面之前,最近显示的所述第一应用的界面;或者,所述第二界面是所述第一应用中预设的一个界面。The method according to any one of claims 1-13, wherein the second interface is the homepage of the first application; or, the second interface is an upper level of the first interface Or, the second interface is the interface of the first application that was recently displayed before the electronic device displays the first interface; or, the second interface is a preset in the first application Of an interface.
  15. 一种电子设备,其特征在于,所述电子设备包括触摸屏、存储器和一个或多个处理器;所述触摸屏、所述存储器和所述处理器耦合;所述存储器用于存储计算机程序代码,所述计算机程序代码包括计算机指令,当所述处理器执行所述计算机指令时,所述电子设备执行如权利要求1-14中任一项所述的方法。An electronic device, characterized in that the electronic device includes a touch screen, a memory and one or more processors; the touch screen, the memory and the processor are coupled; the memory is used to store computer program codes, The computer program code includes computer instructions, and when the processor executes the computer instructions, the electronic device executes the method according to any one of claims 1-14.
  16. 一种显示装置,其特征在于,应用于包括触摸屏的电子设备,所述显示装置用于执行如权利要求1-14中任一项所述的方法。A display device, characterized in that it is applied to an electronic device including a touch screen, and the display device is used to execute the method according to any one of claims 1-14.
  17. 一种芯片***,其特征在于,所述芯片***应用于包括触摸屏的电子设备;所述芯片***包括一个或多个接口电路和一个或多个处理器;所述接口电路和所述处理器通过线路互联;所述接口电路用于从所述电子设备的存储器接收信号,并向所述处理器发送所述信号, 所述信号包括所述存储器中存储的计算机指令;当所述处理器执行所述计算机指令时,所述电子设备执行如权利要求1-14中任一项所述的方法。A chip system, characterized in that the chip system is applied to an electronic device including a touch screen; the chip system includes one or more interface circuits and one or more processors; the interface circuit and the processor pass through Line interconnection; the interface circuit is used to receive a signal from the memory of the electronic device, and send the signal to the processor, the signal includes the computer instructions stored in the memory; when the processor executes all When the computer instruction is used, the electronic device executes the method according to any one of claims 1-14.
  18. 一种计算机存储介质,其特征在于,包括计算机指令,当所述计算机指令在电子设备上运行时,使得所述电子设备执行如权利要求1-14中任一项所述的方法。A computer storage medium, characterized by comprising computer instructions, which when the computer instructions run on an electronic device, causes the electronic device to execute the method according to any one of claims 1-14.
  19. 一种计算机程序产品,其特征在于,当所述计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1-14中任一项所述的方法。A computer program product, characterized in that, when the computer program product runs on a computer, the computer is caused to execute the method according to any one of claims 1-14.
PCT/CN2020/090502 2019-05-17 2020-05-15 Application display method and electronic device WO2020233517A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201910413599.4 2019-05-17
CN201910413599.4A CN110324464A (en) 2019-05-17 2019-05-17 A kind of application display method and electronic equipment

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020233517A1 true WO2020233517A1 (en) 2020-11-26

Family

ID=68113162

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2020/090502 WO2020233517A1 (en) 2019-05-17 2020-05-15 Application display method and electronic device

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN110324464A (en)
WO (1) WO2020233517A1 (en)

Cited By (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114077374A (en) * 2021-11-10 2022-02-22 中国建设银行股份有限公司 Control method, device, equipment, medium and program product of folding screen equipment
CN114546199A (en) * 2022-02-17 2022-05-27 北京百度网讯科技有限公司 Image processing method and device, electronic equipment and storage medium
EP4053690A4 (en) * 2019-11-29 2023-01-11 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Split-screen display processing method and apparatus, and electronic device
CN115658218A (en) * 2022-09-09 2023-01-31 北京百度网讯科技有限公司 Method, device, equipment and storage medium for edge equipment to access cloud
EP4287597A4 (en) * 2022-04-14 2024-04-10 Samsung Electronics Co Ltd Electronic device for displaying screen on basis of transformation of display, and method therefor

Families Citing this family (12)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN116414505A (en) * 2019-05-14 2023-07-11 华为技术有限公司 Application display method and electronic equipment
CN110286972A (en) * 2019-05-14 2019-09-27 华为技术有限公司 A kind of method and electronic equipment of Folding screen display application
CN110324464A (en) * 2019-05-17 2019-10-11 华为技术有限公司 A kind of application display method and electronic equipment
CN110928462B (en) * 2019-11-12 2021-11-02 维沃移动通信有限公司 Display method and electronic equipment
CN110995896A (en) * 2019-11-27 2020-04-10 维沃移动通信有限公司 Control method and electronic equipment
CN110989899B (en) * 2019-11-27 2022-02-22 维沃移动通信(杭州)有限公司 Control method and electronic equipment
CN111176764B (en) 2019-12-10 2022-04-05 华为技术有限公司 Display control method and terminal equipment
CN111256704B (en) * 2020-01-21 2022-06-10 华为技术有限公司 Navigation method and related device of folding screen
WO2021258319A1 (en) * 2020-06-24 2021-12-30 深圳传音控股股份有限公司 Application window display method, terminal device, and storage medium
CN111625163B (en) * 2020-06-29 2023-09-22 青岛海信移动通信技术有限公司 Display equipment and application program interface display method
CN112559924B (en) * 2020-12-22 2021-09-17 北京云思畅想科技有限公司 Universal adaptation method for mobile terminal webpage folding screen
EP4351116A1 (en) * 2022-01-10 2024-04-10 Honor Device Co., Ltd. Window interaction method and electronic device

Citations (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20120290966A1 (en) * 2011-05-11 2012-11-15 KT Corporation, KT TECH INC. Multiple screen mode in mobile terminal
WO2014030912A1 (en) * 2012-08-20 2014-02-27 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Flexible display apparatus and controlling method thereof
EP2998851A1 (en) * 2014-09-18 2016-03-23 LG Electronics Inc. Mobile terminal and method for controlling the same
WO2016052814A1 (en) * 2014-09-30 2016-04-07 Lg Electronics Inc. Mobile terminal and method of controlling the same
CN109062466A (en) * 2018-07-03 2018-12-21 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Split screen window adjusting method, device, storage medium and electronic equipment
CN109445736A (en) * 2018-10-26 2019-03-08 维沃移动通信有限公司 A kind of multi-screen display method and mobile terminal
CN109525704A (en) * 2018-09-21 2019-03-26 维沃移动通信有限公司 A kind of control method and mobile terminal
CN110324464A (en) * 2019-05-17 2019-10-11 华为技术有限公司 A kind of application display method and electronic equipment

Patent Citations (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20120290966A1 (en) * 2011-05-11 2012-11-15 KT Corporation, KT TECH INC. Multiple screen mode in mobile terminal
WO2014030912A1 (en) * 2012-08-20 2014-02-27 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Flexible display apparatus and controlling method thereof
EP2998851A1 (en) * 2014-09-18 2016-03-23 LG Electronics Inc. Mobile terminal and method for controlling the same
WO2016052814A1 (en) * 2014-09-30 2016-04-07 Lg Electronics Inc. Mobile terminal and method of controlling the same
CN109062466A (en) * 2018-07-03 2018-12-21 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Split screen window adjusting method, device, storage medium and electronic equipment
CN109525704A (en) * 2018-09-21 2019-03-26 维沃移动通信有限公司 A kind of control method and mobile terminal
CN109445736A (en) * 2018-10-26 2019-03-08 维沃移动通信有限公司 A kind of multi-screen display method and mobile terminal
CN110324464A (en) * 2019-05-17 2019-10-11 华为技术有限公司 A kind of application display method and electronic equipment

Cited By (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP4053690A4 (en) * 2019-11-29 2023-01-11 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Split-screen display processing method and apparatus, and electronic device
CN114077374A (en) * 2021-11-10 2022-02-22 中国建设银行股份有限公司 Control method, device, equipment, medium and program product of folding screen equipment
CN114546199A (en) * 2022-02-17 2022-05-27 北京百度网讯科技有限公司 Image processing method and device, electronic equipment and storage medium
CN114546199B (en) * 2022-02-17 2023-09-26 北京百度网讯科技有限公司 Image processing method, device, electronic equipment and storage medium
EP4287597A4 (en) * 2022-04-14 2024-04-10 Samsung Electronics Co Ltd Electronic device for displaying screen on basis of transformation of display, and method therefor
CN115658218A (en) * 2022-09-09 2023-01-31 北京百度网讯科技有限公司 Method, device, equipment and storage medium for edge equipment to access cloud

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN110324464A (en) 2019-10-11

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2020233517A1 (en) Application display method and electronic device
WO2020168965A1 (en) Method for controlling electronic device having folding screen, and electronic device
WO2020224449A1 (en) Split-screen display operation method and electronic device
EP3866458B1 (en) Method and device for capturing images
EP3896946B1 (en) Display method for electronic device having flexible screen and electronic device
US20220206741A1 (en) Volume adjustment method and electronic device
WO2020134872A1 (en) Message processing method, related device, and system
WO2021104008A1 (en) Method for displaying folding screen and related apparatus
KR102534354B1 (en) System navigation bar display control method, graphical user interface and electronic device
JP2023514962A (en) DISPLAY METHOD AND RELATED APPARATUS FOR FOLDABLE SCREEN
WO2021213164A1 (en) Application interface interaction method, electronic device, and computer readable storage medium
WO2021008615A1 (en) Interaction method and device based on folding screen
WO2021052279A1 (en) Foldable screen display method and electronic device
WO2021057343A1 (en) Method for operating electronic device and electronic device
WO2021063237A1 (en) Control method for electronic device, and electronic device
WO2020168968A1 (en) Control method for electronic device having foldable screen, and electronic device
WO2021052344A1 (en) Parameter adjustment method and electronic device
WO2021082564A1 (en) Operation prompt method and electronic device
US20220342516A1 (en) Display Method for Electronic Device, Electronic Device, and Computer-Readable Storage Medium
WO2021037146A1 (en) File sharing method and device for mobile terminal
US20220244846A1 (en) User Interface Display Method and Electronic Device
WO2021052407A1 (en) Electronic device control method and electronic device
WO2020221062A1 (en) Navigation operation method and electronic device
WO2021208723A1 (en) Full-screen display method and apparatus, and electronic device
WO2021238370A1 (en) Display control method, electronic device, and computer-readable storage medium

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20809137

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 20809137

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1